UAP2100 Command Reference (V100R002C05 - 01)

HUAWEI UAP2100 Universal Access Platform V100R002C05
Command Reference
Issue Date Part Number 01 2010-11-26 00540457
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China Website: Email: http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
HUAWEI UAP2100 Command Reference
Contents
Contents
1 CLI Usage.....................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Logging In to CLI........................................................................................................................................1-2 1.1.1 Logging In to CLI Locally Through Serial Interface ........................................................................1-2 1.1.2 Logging In to CLI Through Telnet ....................................................................................................1-3 1.2 Mode and Level...........................................................................................................................................1-4 1.3 Syntax Convention ......................................................................................................................................1-4 1.3.1 Command Structure...........................................................................................................................1-5 1.3.2 Symbol Description...........................................................................................................................1-5 1.3.3 Parameter Type..................................................................................................................................1-6 1.4 Operation Guide ..........................................................................................................................................1-6 1.4.1 Complementing a Command.............................................................................................................1-7 1.4.2 Abbreviating a Command..................................................................................................................1-7 1.4.3 Getting a Command ..........................................................................................................................1-8
2 Basic CLI Commands ................................................................................................................2-1

2.1 CLI Environment Setting Commands .........................................................................................................2-2 2.1.1 clear ...................................................................................................................................................2-2 2.1.2 enable ................................................................................................................................................2-2 2.1.3 exit.....................................................................................................................................................2-3 2.1.4 quit ....................................................................................................................................................2-4 2.1.5 set idle-timeout..................................................................................................................................2-4 2.1.6 show idle-timeout..............................................................................................................................2-5 2.1.7 terminal .............................................................................................................................................2-6 2.2 CLI User Management Commands .............................................................................................................2-6 2.2.1 config add cliuser ..............................................................................................................................2-6 2.2.2 config delete cliuser ..........................................................................................................................2-7 2.2.3 config modify enablepassword..........................................................................................................2-8 2.2.4 config modify loginpassword............................................................................................................2-9 2.2.5 show cliuser.......................................................................................................................................2-9 2.2.6 who..................................................................................................................................................2-10 2.2.7 who am i.......................................................................................................................................... 2-11 2.3 CLI Help Commands................................................................................................................................. 2-11 2.3.1 help.................................................................................................................................................. 2-11
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Contents
HUAWEI UAP2100 Command Reference 2.3.2 list....................................................................................................................................................2-12 2.3.3 show history ....................................................................................................................................2-18
3 Configuration Commands........................................................................................................3-1
3.1 config add am ..............................................................................................................................................3-2 3.2 config add anonymouscall...........................................................................................................................3-3 3.3 config add batch sipue .................................................................................................................................3-3 3.4 config add callpurview ................................................................................................................................3-5 3.5 config add callsource...................................................................................................................................3-6 3.6 config add card slot type atu........................................................................................................................3-7 3.7 config add card slot type dtu .......................................................................................................................3-8 3.8 config add cassignal ....................................................................................................................................3-9 3.9 config add cp .............................................................................................................................................3-10 3.10 config add cti ........................................................................................................................................... 3-11 3.11 config add fp............................................................................................................................................3-12 3.12 config add hostprefix...............................................................................................................................3-13 3.13 config add line report...............................................................................................................................3-14 3.14 config add line send.................................................................................................................................3-15 3.15 config add localseat .................................................................................................................................3-16 3.16 config add logserver ................................................................................................................................3-17 3.17 config add mg..........................................................................................................................................3-18 3.18 config add mpu type at0 officeno ............................................................................................................3-20 3.19 config add mra.........................................................................................................................................3-21 3.20 config add nfs ..........................................................................................................................................3-22 3.21 config add nirc prefix ..............................................................................................................................3-23 3.22 config add numdeal .................................................................................................................................3-24 3.23 config add office......................................................................................................................................3-25 3.24 config add office selectcode ....................................................................................................................3-27 3.25 config add peercomponent ......................................................................................................................3-28 3.26 config add pralink....................................................................................................................................3-29 3.27 config add predeal index changetype delete ............................................................................................3-30 3.28 config add predeal index changetype insert.............................................................................................3-31 3.29 config add predeal index changetype modify ..........................................................................................3-32 3.30 config add prefix dn callcategory ............................................................................................................3-33 3.31 config add prefix intess ...........................................................................................................................3-37 3.32 config add pstndeal..................................................................................................................................3-38 3.33 config add reanalysis prefix.....................................................................................................................3-39 3.34 config add ringrelate................................................................................................................................3-41 3.35 config add ringservice .............................................................................................................................3-47 3.36 config add ringtype..................................................................................................................................3-48 3.37 config add sipselect .................................................................................................................................3-51 3.38 config add sipue.......................................................................................................................................3-53
ii
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Contents
3.39 config add staticgw..................................................................................................................................3-54 3.40 config add subbox ...................................................................................................................................3-55 3.41 config add subscriber domainname .........................................................................................................3-56 3.42 config add subscriber eid.........................................................................................................................3-57 3.43 config add subscriber mpu dn..................................................................................................................3-59 3.44 config add subscriber subbox ..................................................................................................................3-60 3.45 config add tgld.........................................................................................................................................3-61 3.46 config add tts connectpara .......................................................................................................................3-62 3.47 config add tts textpara .............................................................................................................................3-63 3.48 config add vp ...........................................................................................................................................3-65 3.49 config autosave........................................................................................................................................3-66 3.50 config cancelisolate card .........................................................................................................................3-67 3.51 config cancelisolate mpu .........................................................................................................................3-68 3.52 config ccm billforat0 ...............................................................................................................................3-68 3.53 config cdsp ..............................................................................................................................................3-69 3.54 config cdsp dtmf ......................................................................................................................................3-70 3.55 config cdsp fax ........................................................................................................................................3-71 3.56 config cdsp rfc2198 .................................................................................................................................3-72 3.57 config cdsp rfc2833 .................................................................................................................................3-73 3.58 config createbill.......................................................................................................................................3-73 3.59 config delete am ......................................................................................................................................3-74 3.60 config delete anonymouscall ...................................................................................................................3-75 3.61 config delete batch sipue .........................................................................................................................3-76 3.62 config delete batch sptfile........................................................................................................................3-77 3.63 config delete callpurview ........................................................................................................................3-78 3.64 config delete callsource ...........................................................................................................................3-78 3.65 config delete card ....................................................................................................................................3-79 3.66 config delete cassignal.............................................................................................................................3-80 3.67 config delete cp .......................................................................................................................................3-81 3.68 config delete cti .......................................................................................................................................3-82 3.69 config delete fp........................................................................................................................................3-82 3.70 config delete hostprefix ...........................................................................................................................3-83 3.71 config delete line report...........................................................................................................................3-84 3.72 config delete line send .............................................................................................................................3-85 3.73 config delete localseat .............................................................................................................................3-86 3.74 config delete logserver ............................................................................................................................3-87 3.75 config delete mg ......................................................................................................................................3-88 3.76 config delete mpu type at0 ......................................................................................................................3-88 3.77 config delete mra .....................................................................................................................................3-89 3.78 config delete nfs ......................................................................................................................................3-90 3.79 config delete nirc prefix...........................................................................................................................3-91 3.80 config delete numdeal..............................................................................................................................3-92
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
iii
Contents
3.81 config delete office ..................................................................................................................................3-93 3.82 config delete office selectcode.................................................................................................................3-93 3.83 config delete peercomponent...................................................................................................................3-94 3.84 config delete pralink ................................................................................................................................3-95 3.85 config delete predeal................................................................................................................................3-96 3.86 config delete prefix..................................................................................................................................3-96 3.87 config delete pstndeal ..............................................................................................................................3-97 3.88 config delete ringrelate ............................................................................................................................3-98 3.89 config delete ringservice..........................................................................................................................3-99 3.90 config delete ringtype ............................................................................................................................3-100 3.91 config delete sipselect............................................................................................................................3-101 3.92 config delete sipue.................................................................................................................................3-102 3.93 config delete staticgw ............................................................................................................................3-102 3.94 config delete subbox..............................................................................................................................3-103 3.95 config delete subscriber dn....................................................................................................................3-104 3.96 config delete subscriber domainname ...................................................................................................3-105 3.97 config delete subscriber mpu.................................................................................................................3-106 3.98 config delete subscriber subboxno ........................................................................................................3-106 3.99 config delete tgld ...................................................................................................................................3-107 3.100 config delete tts connectpara ...............................................................................................................3-108 3.101 config delete tts textpara......................................................................................................................3-109 3.102 config delete vp ................................................................................................................................... 3-110 3.103 config download .................................................................................................................................. 3-111 3.104 config isolate card................................................................................................................................ 3-113 3.105 config isolate mpu ............................................................................................................................... 3-114 3.106 config localgw ..................................................................................................................................... 3-114 3.107 config mfpstop..................................................................................................................................... 3-115 3.108 config modify at0tkc card slot portinboard ......................................................................................... 3-116 3.109 config modify at0tkc mpu portinboard ................................................................................................ 3-117 3.110 config modify batch sipue ................................................................................................................... 3-118 3.111 config modify callpurview...................................................................................................................3-120 3.112 config modify card slot type atu portincard.........................................................................................3-121 3.113 config modify card slot type trunkport ................................................................................................3-122 3.114 config modify card slot type tkcincard ................................................................................................3-124 3.115 config modify cassignal.......................................................................................................................3-125 3.116 config modify hostprefix .....................................................................................................................3-126 3.117 config modify interface .......................................................................................................................3-127 3.118 config modify localcrbt .......................................................................................................................3-129 3.119 config modify localvpchannel .............................................................................................................3-129 3.120 config modify mg domainname...........................................................................................................3-130 3.121 config modify mg ip ............................................................................................................................3-132 3.122 config modify mpu type at0 portincard ...............................................................................................3-134
iv
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Contents
3.123 config modify nfs ................................................................................................................................3-135 3.124 config modify notefile .........................................................................................................................3-136 3.125 config modify office no incomingright................................................................................................3-138 3.126 config modify office no officeselectcode ............................................................................................3-139 3.127 config modify office selectcode...........................................................................................................3-141 3.128 config modify peercomponent.............................................................................................................3-142 3.129 config modify pralink ..........................................................................................................................3-143 3.130 config modify prefix............................................................................................................................3-144 3.131 config modify reanalysis prefix...........................................................................................................3-150 3.132 config modify ringrelate ......................................................................................................................3-151 3.133 config modify ringservice....................................................................................................................3-158 3.134 config modify ringtype ........................................................................................................................3-158 3.135 config modify sip parameter................................................................................................................3-162 3.136 config modify sipue.............................................................................................................................3-163 3.137 config modify sptfile ...........................................................................................................................3-164 3.138 config modify staticgw ........................................................................................................................3-165 3.139 config modify statpara.........................................................................................................................3-166 3.140 config modify statswitch .....................................................................................................................3-167 3.141 config modify subbox no aulaw ..........................................................................................................3-168 3.142 config modify subscriber directdial disable.........................................................................................3-169 3.143 config modify subscriber directdial dn portinmainboard.....................................................................3-170 3.144 config modify subscriber directdial dn slot portinboard......................................................................3-171 3.145 config modify subscriber dn ................................................................................................................3-172 3.146 config modify subscriber dn newdn ....................................................................................................3-176 3.147 config modify subscriber domainname ...............................................................................................3-177 3.148 config modify sysmid ..........................................................................................................................3-178 3.149 config modify tdmintesstimer..............................................................................................................3-179 3.150 config modify tgld ...............................................................................................................................3-179 3.151 config modify tts connectpara .............................................................................................................3-181 3.152 config modify tts textpara....................................................................................................................3-182 3.153 config modify tts voicepara .................................................................................................................3-184 3.154 config modify tts voicepara setdefault.................................................................................................3-185 3.155 config patch activate............................................................................................................................3-186 3.156 config patch deactivate ........................................................................................................................3-186 3.157 config patch delete...............................................................................................................................3-187 3.158 config patch load .................................................................................................................................3-188 3.159 config patch save .................................................................................................................................3-189 3.160 config potscp dtmf send mode.............................................................................................................3-189 3.161 config pra huawei ................................................................................................................................3-190 3.162 config pra pseudo alerting ...................................................................................................................3-191 3.163 config protocol at0...............................................................................................................................3-192 3.164 config protocol cassignal.....................................................................................................................3-193
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Contents
3.165 config protocol h323 disable officeno .................................................................................................3-194 3.166 config protocol h323 officeno domainname........................................................................................3-195 3.167 config protocol h323 signalport...........................................................................................................3-196 3.168 config protocol pra ..............................................................................................................................3-197 3.169 config protocol sip disable officeno ....................................................................................................3-198 3.170 config protocol sip officeno.................................................................................................................3-199 3.171 config siplocalgenerate disable............................................................................................................3-200 3.172 config siplocalgenerate enable.............................................................................................................3-201 3.173 config system clocksource oscillator ...................................................................................................3-202 3.174 config system clocksource primaryslot ...............................................................................................3-203 3.175 config system supportcodetype ...........................................................................................................3-204 3.176 config system domainname .................................................................................................................3-204 3.177 config system gateway ........................................................................................................................3-205 3.178 config system hostip ............................................................................................................................3-206 3.179 config system ip...................................................................................................................................3-207 3.180 config upload.......................................................................................................................................3-208
4 Display Commands ...................................................................................................................4-1

4.1 display cp by................................................................................................................................................4-2 4.2 display cpchannel ........................................................................................................................................4-3 4.3 display fp by ................................................................................................................................................4-5 4.4 display fpchannel.........................................................................................................................................4-6 4.5 display vp by ...............................................................................................................................................4-8 4.6 display vpchannel ........................................................................................................................................4-9 4.7 show aminfo .............................................................................................................................................. 4-11 4.8 show anonymouscall .................................................................................................................................4-12 4.9 show at0tkc card........................................................................................................................................4-13 4.10 show at0tkc mpu......................................................................................................................................4-14 4.11 show autosave switch ..............................................................................................................................4-15 4.12 show callpurview.....................................................................................................................................4-15 4.13 show callsourceno ...................................................................................................................................4-16 4.14 show card.................................................................................................................................................4-17 4.15 show ccm billforat0 .................................................................................................................................4-18 4.16 show cdsp argu ........................................................................................................................................4-18 4.17 show component......................................................................................................................................4-19 4.18 show component domainname ................................................................................................................4-20 4.19 show component type ..............................................................................................................................4-21 4.20 show cp....................................................................................................................................................4-23 4.21 show createbill switch .............................................................................................................................4-24 4.22 show ctinfo ..............................................................................................................................................4-24 4.23 show device .............................................................................................................................................4-26 4.24 show disconnectrecord ............................................................................................................................4-27
vi
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Contents
4.25 show dspchannel......................................................................................................................................4-27 4.26 show fp ....................................................................................................................................................4-29 4.27 show hostprefix .......................................................................................................................................4-30 4.28 show interface..........................................................................................................................................4-31 4.29 show license ............................................................................................................................................4-33 4.30 show line report .......................................................................................................................................4-35 4.31 show line send .........................................................................................................................................4-36 4.32 show localcrbt..........................................................................................................................................4-37 4.33 show localgw...........................................................................................................................................4-38 4.34 show localvpchannel ...............................................................................................................................4-39 4.35 show logserverinfo ..................................................................................................................................4-39 4.36 show mfpstop overtime ...........................................................................................................................4-40 4.37 show mg ..................................................................................................................................................4-41 4.38 show mpu ................................................................................................................................................4-42 4.39 show mrainfo...........................................................................................................................................4-43 4.40 show net alarm.........................................................................................................................................4-44 4.41 show nfs...................................................................................................................................................4-46 4.42 show nirc prefix.......................................................................................................................................4-48 4.43 show numdeal..........................................................................................................................................4-49 4.44 show office ..............................................................................................................................................4-50 4.45 show office selectcode.............................................................................................................................4-51 4.46 show peercomponent ...............................................................................................................................4-52 4.47 show potscp dtmf send ............................................................................................................................4-53 4.48 show pra huawei......................................................................................................................................4-53 4.49 show pra pseudo alerting mode ...............................................................................................................4-54 4.50 show pralink ............................................................................................................................................4-55 4.51 show predeal............................................................................................................................................4-56 4.52 show prefix ..............................................................................................................................................4-56 4.53 show prefix callcategory..........................................................................................................................4-57 4.54 show protocol ..........................................................................................................................................4-60 4.55 show pstndeal ..........................................................................................................................................4-61 4.56 show ringrelate ........................................................................................................................................4-62 4.57 show ringservice......................................................................................................................................4-63 4.58 show ringtype ..........................................................................................................................................4-64 4.59 show running time ...................................................................................................................................4-65 4.60 show seatno .............................................................................................................................................4-65 4.61 show sip parameter ..................................................................................................................................4-67 4.62 show siplocalgenerate..............................................................................................................................4-67 4.63 show sipselect..........................................................................................................................................4-68 4.64 show sipue ...............................................................................................................................................4-70 4.65 show sptfile relation ................................................................................................................................4-70 4.66 show staticgw ..........................................................................................................................................4-72
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
vii
Contents
4.67 show statpara ...........................................................................................................................................4-72 4.68 show statswitch........................................................................................................................................4-73 4.69 show subbox ............................................................................................................................................4-74 4.70 show subscriber .......................................................................................................................................4-76 4.71 show subscriber by callsourceno .............................................................................................................4-77 4.72 show subscriber by pbxgroupno ..............................................................................................................4-78 4.73 show subscriber dn type ..........................................................................................................................4-78 4.74 show subscriber domainname..................................................................................................................4-80 4.75 show subscriber filter ..............................................................................................................................4-81 4.76 show subscriber pots................................................................................................................................4-83 4.77 show subscriber state...............................................................................................................................4-85 4.78 show subscriber subbox...........................................................................................................................4-86 4.79 show system clocksource information.....................................................................................................4-88 4.80 show system information.........................................................................................................................4-88 4.81 show system media consult switch..........................................................................................................4-89 4.82 show system time ....................................................................................................................................4-90 4.83 show tdmintesstimer................................................................................................................................4-91 4.84 show tgld .................................................................................................................................................4-92 4.85 show tkc slot............................................................................................................................................4-93 4.86 show tkc slot portinboard ........................................................................................................................4-95 4.87 show tts connectpara................................................................................................................................4-97 4.88 show tts textpara......................................................................................................................................4-98 4.89 show tts voicepara ...................................................................................................................................4-99 4.90 show version..........................................................................................................................................4-100 4.91 show vp .................................................................................................................................................4-101
5 Maintenance Commands ..........................................................................................................5-1

5.1 block subscriber dn......................................................................................................................................5-2 5.2 block subscriber domainname .....................................................................................................................5-2 5.3 config system date time ...............................................................................................................................5-3 5.4 ping..............................................................................................................................................................5-4 5.5 reboot...........................................................................................................................................................5-5 5.6 reset board ...................................................................................................................................................5-6 5.7 reset card .....................................................................................................................................................5-6 5.8 reset mc51 ...................................................................................................................................................5-7 5.9 resource trace start board mpu.....................................................................................................................5-8 5.10 resource trace start dsp mpu ......................................................................................................................5-9 5.11 resource trace start e1 ................................................................................................................................5-9 5.12 resource trace stop board mpu .................................................................................................................5-10 5.13 resource trace stop dsp mpu .................................................................................................................... 5-11 5.14 resource trace stop e1 .............................................................................................................................. 5-11 5.15 save..........................................................................................................................................................5-12
viii
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Contents
5.16 start load subbox......................................................................................................................................5-13 5.17 switch workmode ....................................................................................................................................5-14 5.18 telnet ........................................................................................................................................................5-14 5.19 unblock subscriber dn..............................................................................................................................5-15 5.20 unblock subscriber domainname .............................................................................................................5-16
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
ix
Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 Connecting the UAP2100 host for logging in to CLI locally..........................................................1-2 Figure 1-2 Connecting the UAP2100 host for logging in to CLI remotely ......................................................1-3
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
xi
Tables
Tables
Table 1-1 Mapping between operation mode and user level.............................................................................1-4 Table 1-2 Symbols in the syntax of the command line .....................................................................................1-5 Table 1-3 Parameter type in a command line....................................................................................................1-6
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
xiii
1 CLI Usage
1
About This Chapter
Section 1.1 Logging In to CLI 1.2 Mode and Level 1.3 Syntax Convention 1.4 Operation Guide Describes
CLI Usage
By using the Command Line Interface (CLI), you can enter commands on a computer and get the result of carrying out the commands. Therefore, you can manage the device easily. Before detailing the device configuration and maintenance commands, this chapter describes the CLI access method, related concepts and operation guide. The following table lists the contents of this chapter.
Describes the method of logging in to the CLI locally through the serial interface and logging in to the CLI through Telnet. Describes the CLI operation mode, the user level, and the mapping between CLI operation mode and user level. Describes the command structure, symbol description and parameter definition. Describes the method of complementing a command, abbreviating a command, and getting a command.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
1-1
1 CLI Usage
1.1 Logging In to CLI

Before configuring the device, you need to log in to CLI through a personal computer (PC). For UAP2100, you can log in to CLI in any of the following two methods:

Logging in to CLI locally through serial interface Logging in to CLI remotely through Telnet
1.1.1 Logging In to CLI Locally Through Serial Interface

Step 1 Make sure that the COM port on the PC is properly connected to the CONSOLE port on the UAP2100 host through a serial cable, as shown in Figure 1-1. Figure 1-1 Connecting the UAP2100 host for logging in to CLI locally
Serial Cable
Operation Terminal
UAP2100
For UAP2100 host, the CONSOLE port is on the front panel of the cabinet and the port flag is CONSOLE.
Step 2 Start the HyperTerminal or other serial interface terminal software of the Windows system on the PC. Step 3 Set up a connection and set the COM port based on the following items:

Baud rate: 9600 Data bit: 8 Parity check: None Stop bit: 1 Traffic control: None
Step 4 After setting up the connection, make sure that the device information is displayed on the screen of the PC. Step 5 Enter the user name and password. If the screen displays the prompt with the device model, it means that you have logged in to CLI successfully. For example,
[.login .] Login:>admin [.password .] Password:>****** [.result .] succeed
[%UAP2100]>
1-2
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
1 CLI Usage
The user name and password are case-sensitive. When logging in to CLI, by default, you need to enter the user name admin and the password huawei. Then the administrator can change the password of the user admin and create another user. For the command, see section 2.2 "CLI User Management Command."
---- End
1.1.2 Logging In to CLI Through Telnet

To log in to CLI through Telnet, you need to enter command lines of the Windows system or run the Telnet terminal software. This section describes how to log in to CLI through Telnet by entering command lines of the Windows system. Step 1 Make sure that the PC and the UAP2100 host have accessed the LAN (as shown in Figure 12), and they are assigned the IP address. Figure 1-2 Connecting the UAP2100 host for logging in to CLI remotely
Operation Terminal
UAP2100
Make sure that the UAP2100 host is connected to the network properly when you test the UAP2100 host by carrying out the ping command. Step 2 Access the command line window on the PC. Enter the telnet command to connect the UAP2100 host. When the screen displays the device information, it means that the UAP2100 host is connected successfully to the network. For example,
telnet 192.168.1.37 Trying 192.168.1.37... Connected to 192.168.1.37. Escape character is '^]'. UAP OS V100R002******* (built on Apr 13 2007) on UAP2100
Step 3 Enter the user name and password. When the screen displays the prompt with the device model, it means that you have logged in to CLI successfully. For example,
[.login .] Login:>admin [.password .] Password:>****** [.result .] succeed
[%UAP2100]>
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
1-3
1 CLI Usage
The user name and password are case-sensitive. When logging in to CLI, by default, you need to enter the user name admin and the password huawei. Then the administrator can change the password of the user admin and create another user. For the command, see section 2.2 "CLI User Management Command."
---- End
1.2 Mode and Level

The UAP2100 CLI supports two operation modes, which are described as follows:
View mode By default, a user logs in to CLI in View mode. In this case, the user can carry out the show command and the general command (for example, clear, help, list, exit) of CLI. In View mode, the command prompt is the angle bracket >.
Config mode The Config mode is adopted after you to switch from the View mode. In Config mode, a user can carry out all the commands in View mode. In addition, the user can carry out the config command and the device maintenance command (for example, reboot and reset). In Config mode, the command prompt is the symbol #.
The following two user levels are specified for UAP2100 CLI.
Normal user A normal user is created by the administrator. He can access the View mode only and carry out all the commands in View mode.
Administrator The administrator is created by the former administrator. By default, the administrator is admin. After accessing the View mode, the administrator can carry out all the commands in View mode. He can also switch from the View mode to the Config mode by carrying out the enable command. In addition, he can carry out all the commands in Config mode.
Table 1-1shows the mapping between operation mode and user level. Table 1-1 Mapping between operation mode and user level User Level Normal Administrator View Mode Allowed Allowed Config Mode Not allowed Allowed
1.3 Syntax Convention

Before carrying out the UAP2100 commands, you must be familiar to the conventions of their syntax, which includes the following three aspects:
Command structure
1-4
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)

1 CLI Usage
Symbol description Parameter type
1.3.1 Command Structure

For UAP2100 command lines, all the command description is based on the specified syntax. Command description = Command header + Parameter body Parameter body = Parameter 1 + Parameter 2 + Parameter 3 +... Parameter = Key word + Value For example, config add office no 0 officeselectcode 1 In the preceding command line, the command header is config add office, the parameter body is no 0 officeselectcode 1. In the parameter body, parameter 1 is no 0, and parameter 2 is officeselectcode 1. For parameter 1, the key word is no and the value is 0.
1.3.2 Symbol Description

You can find various symbols in the command. These symbols show how to enter a command rather than the command itself. Table 1-2 details the description of the symbols used in the command line. Table 1-2 Symbols in the syntax of the command line Symbol <> Description Indicates that a value is mandatory in this section for a command. For example, in the config delete office no <0-254>command, you must enter a value from 0 to 254 in <0-254>. [] Indicates that the value in this section is optional. For example, in the config add office no <0-254> officeselectcode <0254> [incomingright <inter | local | localtoll | ddd | idd>] command, incomingright <inter | local | localtoll | ddd | idd> is optional. | Functions similarly as the logical OR. The options separated by the vertical bar | are in the logical relation OR. For example, the config add office no <0-254> officeselectcode <0-254> [incomingright <inter | local | localtoll | ddd | idd>] command can be followed by inter,local,localtoll,ddd or idd after you enter the key word incomingrightl. & The options separated by & can be entered separately or together. For config modify callpurview k <0-9> [purview <inter&local&localtoll&nationaltoll&internationaltoll&tonesupervision>] , when purview is entered, it can be followed by inter, inter&local, nationaltoll&internationaltoll, and so on.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
1-5
1 CLI Usage
1.3.3 Parameter Type

The values in a command line can be used for one or more types of parameter. Table 1-3 shows the definition and example of each type of parameter. Table 1-3 Parameter type in a command line Parameter IP Address IP Mask Integer String Definition A.B.C.D A.B.C.D/M <minnummaxnum> <string> Example 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.1/24. The value 24 indicates the mask 255.255.255.0. <1-60000>. The value 1 is the minimum value and the value 60000 is the maximum value. <UserName>. A string with blank space cannot be taken as the parameter value. For example, the string "The software needs testing" cannot be taken as the parameter value. 2006-08-17 14:00:00 For < list (1-8)>. The values 1-3, 6, 7, 8 are valid, but the values 0-9 are invalid. The value all can be taken as the value. In this case, the value all indicates 1-8. For <ag1032 | tg1000 | oam>, any of ag1032, tg1000 and oam can be entered.
Date Time List
<YYYY-MMDD> <HH:MM:SS> <list(min:max)>
Enumerative type
<Enumerative name 1 | Enumerative name 2 | Enumerative name 3> < Flag name 0&Flag name 1&Flag name 2> <AA-BB-CC-DDEE-FF>
Flag
For <mgcp&h.248&pots>, mgcp or mgcp&h.248 can be entered. 20-2B-3A-00-00-8A
MAC Address
If the A, B, C or D of IP Address and IP Mask starts with 0, it is an octal numeral rather than a decimal numeral. For example, 011 indicates not 11, but 9.
1.4 Operation Guide

This section describes the method and tips of carrying out the CLI command, including:
1-6
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)

1 CLI Usage
Complementing a Command Abbreviating a command Getting a command
1.4.1 Complementing a Command

You can press the Tab key to enable the function of complementing a command. That is, after entering some information and from which you can known the command, you can press the Tab key to complement the command.

If several commands match the entered information, a list of the possible commands is shown for your choice. If only one command matches the entered information, it is complemented automatically in the command line. In this case, the cursor moves to the end of the command line.
For example,
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add // Press the Tab key. Then the screen displays all ringrelate ringservice callsource pbxgroup board h323endpoint office peercomponent predeal pralink replacenum subscriber [%UAP2100(config)]# config add call // Press the Tab key. Then the system // Press the Tab key. Then the // Press the Tab key. Then the complements off to callsource automatically. [%UAP2100(config)]# config add callsource [%UAP2100(config)]# config add callsource no system does not complement the key word. [%UAP2100(config)]# config add callsource no system complements the key word no automatically. ringtype callpurview cliuser tgld chgnum mg otmn pickupgroup prefix remotegk staticgw
1.4.2 Abbreviating a Command

You can enter a word of a command or the first few letters of the key word if the entered information is understood correctly. For example, to display the device information, you can enter any of the following abbreviated commands:

sh sys infor ssi
The preceding abbreviated commands map the full command of show system information.
You cannot enter a command that is too short (for example, the command s s i) unless you are sure that the abbreviated command is the one you want to carry out.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
1-7
1 CLI Usage
1.4.3 Getting a Command

You can enter the question mark ? to display the descriptive information (namely, the syntax of the command at the current position) of the CLI command. By getting the prompt information while you enter a command, you can complete the command line until you get a command that can be carried out. For example,
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add // After entering the characters, you can enter the question mark ?. Then the system displays the prompt information of the command syntax after config add. board callpurview callsource chgnum cliuser h323endpoint mg office otmn pbxgroup peercomponent pickupgroup predeal prefix pralink remotegk replacenum ringrelate ringservice ringtype staticgw subscriber tgld vuscript [%UAP2100(config)]# config add callsource // After entering the characters, you can enter the question mark ?. Then the system displays the prompt information of the command syntax after config add callsource. no [%UAP2100(config)]# config add callsource no // After entering the characters, you can enter the question mark ?. Then the system displays the prompt information of the command syntax after config add callsource no. <0-255>
If the last line of the prompt information is <cr> Just Press Enter to Execute command!, it means that you can press the Enter key to carry out the command.
1-8
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
2 Basic CLI Commands
2
About This Chapter
Section 2.1 CLI Environment Setting Commands 2.2 CLI User Management Commands 2.3 CLI Help Commands
Basic CLI Commands
The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Describes Describes the function, Syntax, parameters, modes, usage guidelines, examples and related commands of the CLI environment setting commands. Describes the function, Syntax, parameters, modes, usage guidelines, examples and related commands of the CLI user management commands. Describes the function, Syntax, parameters, modes, usage guidelines, examples and related commands of the CLI help commands.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
2-1
2.1 CLI Environment Setting Commands

2.1.1 clear
Function
This command is used to clear the information on the screen.
Syntax
clear
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to clear the information on the screen.
Examples
To clear all the information on the screen, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> clear
Related Commands
None.
2.1.2 enable
Function
The command is used to switch View mode to Config mode.
Syntax
enable
Parameters
None.
2-2
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
A password is required after the command is carried out. View mode switch to Config mode after successful authentication.
Examples
Run the following command to switch View mode to Config mode:
[%UAP2100]> enable [.password .] Password:> [.result .] succeed [%UAP2100(config)]#
Related Commands
exit
2.1.3 exit
Function
This command is used to exit from the current mode.
Syntax
exit
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines

If the current mode is Config, carry out the command to return to View mode. If the current mode is View, carry out the command to exit the command line system.
Examples
To exit from Config mode to View mode, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# exit [%UAP2100]>
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
2-3
Related Commands
enable
2.1.4 quit
Function
This command is used to quit the system.
Syntax
quit
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to quit the system to the initial state.
Examples
To quit the system to the initial state, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> quit
Related Commands
None.
2.1.5 set idle-timeout

Function
This command is used to set the idle-timeout.
Syntax
set idle-timeout <0-30000>
Parameters
Parameter and Value idle-timeout <0-30000> Description Indicates the idle-timeout, in minute. Default Value None
2-4
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to set the idle-timeout. If there is no operation to serial port during the timeout, the system automatically quits to the initial state. If the value of idle-timeout is set to 0, the system does not automatically quit to the initial state.
Examples
To set the value of idle-timeout to 2000, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# set idle-timeout 20000
Related Commands
show idle-timeout
2.1.6 show idle-timeout

Function
This command is used to view the setting of connection timeout.
Syntax
show idle-timeout
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to view the setting of connection timeout.
Examples
To view the setting of connection timeout, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show idle-timeout Idle time out is set to 20000 minutes 0 seconds.
Related commands
set idle-timeout
Issue 01 (2010-11-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-5
2.1.7 terminal
Function
This command is used to configure the maximum number of showed lines of the output results.
Syntax
terminal length <0-512>
Parameters
Parameter and Value length <0-512> Description Indicates the number of displayed lines Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
If the lines of the output results exceeds n that is set, the system stops after showing n lines and prompts "Press any key to continue Ctrl+C to stop". Press any key to show the later information and press Ctrl+C to stop.
Examples
The configuration information can be showed up to 20 lines.
[%UAP2100]> terminal length 20
Related Commands
None.
2.2 CLI User Management Commands

2.2.1 config add cliuser
Function
This command is used to add the command line user.
Syntax
config add cliuser name <string> loginpassword <string> [enablepassword <string>]
2-6
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameters
Parameter and Value name <string> loginpassword <string> enablepassword <string> Description Indicates the user name Indicates the login password for accessing to the View mode Indicates the password for switching from the View mode to the Config mode Default Value None None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines

The user name must be equal to or greater than 4 digits; and the password is not smaller than 6 digits. Do not set the enablepassword parameter when adding a common user. Set the enablepassword parameter when adding an administrator user.
Examples
To add an administrator user: the user name is abcd, loginpassword is shenzhen and enablepassword is huawei. Carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add cliuser name abcd loginpassword shenzhen enablepassword huawei
Related Commands
config delete cliuser show cliuser
2.2.2 config delete cliuser

Function
This command is used to remove the command line user.
Syntax
config delete cliuser name <string>
Parameters
Parameter and Value name <string> Description Indicates the user name Default Value None
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
2-7
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to remove only the exit command line user. Use the show cliuser command can view whether the user to be removed exits.
Examples
To remove the cliuser aaaa, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete cliuser name aaaa
Related Commands
config add cliuser show cliuser
2.2.3 config modify enablepassword

Function
This command is used to change the current user password for accessing to the Config mode.
Syntax
config modify enablepassword
Parameters
None.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Run the command and press Enter. The system prompts to enter a new password. When you enter a new password, the system prompts to enter the new password again for checking. The passwords you enter twice must be the same.
Examples
To change the current user password for accessing to the Config mode, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify enablepassword.
2-8
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Related Commands
config add cliuser
2.2.4 config modify loginpassword

Function
This command is used to remove the login password of the current user.
Syntax
config modify loginpassword
Parameters
None.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Run the command and press Enter. The system prompts to enter a new password. When you enter a new password, the system prompts to enter the new password again for checking. The passwords you enter twice must be the same.
Examples
To change the login password of the current user, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify loginpassword
Related Commands
config add cliuser
2.2.5 show cliuser

Function
This command is used to show all the command line users.
Syntax
show cliuser
Parameters
None.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
2-9
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To show all the command line users, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show cliuser UserName Type -------- ----admin admin
Related Commands
config delete cliuser config add cliuser
2.2.6 who
Function
This command is used to show the users who have logged in.
Syntax
who
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to show the user name, IP address and current command mode of the user.
Examples
To show the user who has logged in, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> who SessionID UserName Location 33 admin Mode Establish Time Elapse(s) --------- -------- ----------- ---------------- ------------------- --------172.20.3.70 VIEW(That's me.) 2007-02-11 23:23:25 100
2-10
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Related Commands
None.
2.2.7 who am i
Function
This command is used to show the information of the current user.
Syntax
who am i
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to view the information of the current user.
Examples
[%UAP2100]> who am i I am Session [33] : user admin connected from 172.20.3.70
Related Commands
None.
2.3 CLI Help Commands

2.3.1 help
Function
This command is used to query help information.
Syntax
help
Modes
View.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
2-11
Parameters
None.
Usage Guidelines
Carry out the command. The system prompts the following two methods for help:

Type ? directly to view the commands, the parameters and the description. Type the list command and then press Enter to view the command list.
Examples
To query help information, carry out the following command.
[%UAP2100]> help OMU Client provides help feature as described below. 1. Anytime you need help, just press "?" and don't press Enter,you can see each possible command argument and its description. 2. You can also input "list" and then press Enter to execute this helpful command to view the list of commands you can use.
Related Commands
None.
2.3.2 list
Function
This command is used to show all the available commands in the current mode.
Syntax
list [string <parastr>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value string <parastr> Description Indicates the character string Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
If parameter string is not typed, use this command to show all the commands in the current mode.
2-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
If parameter string is typed, use this command to show the commands in the current mode which include parameter value.
Examples
To view all the commands in the current mode, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]>list Command List config system date <yyyy-mm-dd> time <hh:mm:ss> show cliuser show digitmap default [protocol <mgcp|h248>] show digitmap [protocol <mgcp|h248>] show localvpchannel show tone125predeal show ums [no <0-254>] show wmxchargepara show ag billing show all files show aminfo show anonymouscall show at0 overlapsend timerlen show at0 sendremoteoffhookcondition show at0 tonectrflag show at0tkc card slot <1-4> show at0tkc mpu show autosave switch show billpoolfull billdiscard show blackandwhite calltype <caller|callee> [grouptype <blackgroup|whit... show blackandwhite part startno <0-1249> calltype <caller|callee> [grou... show calleddnlimit information show callerdnlimit information show callerprefix [dn <string:1-15>] show callpark timer show callpark [dn <string:1-16>] show callpurview [k <0-9>] show callsourceno show card [slot <1-4>] show cassignal show cassignal tonetoflag show cassignal work mode show ccm billforat0 switch show ccm outcallwithlocalright switch show cdsp argu show cdsp payloadtype show centrex group [no <0-49>] show centrex longno shortno <string:1-8> [centrexgroupno <0-49>] show centrex outgoingrights centrexgroupno <0-49> [kvalue <0-9>] show centrex prefix [centrexgroupno <0-49>] [dn <string:1-7>] show centrex subscriber centrexgroupno <0-49> show changenum part startnum <1-3000> show changenum [oldnumber <string:1-24>] show cno1intesstimer show collectcall freebill switch show collectcall switch
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
2-13

show colorring file show colorring parameter show component domainname <string:1-31>
show component type <ss|ag|cmu|ssx|pots> [compid <0-1023>] [number <1-1024>] show component [compid <0-1023>] [number <1-1024>] show conference [roomno <0-96>] show cp show createbill switch show ctinfo show default callforward [dn <string:1-16>] [type <cfnr|cfb|cfu|cfo>] show device show disconnectrecord domainname <string:1-31> show dspchannel channel <0-63> channelstatus <sigsend|sigrecv|dtmfsend|... show dspchannel channel <0-63> [number <1-64>] show environment show faxmail [dn <string:1-24>] show file system information show file [type <commandxml|alarmxml|boardxml|featuresxml|clixml>] show fp show gdspchannel status channel <0-127> [number <1-128>] show gkm show gkmadminuser show gkmserver show gkmusernode show gkprefix show h323endpoint show hint tone show hookflashtime mpu show hookflashtime subbox [no <1-4>] show hostprefix [dn <string:1-15>] show instantconf regnum show license show line report [id <0-254>] show line send [id <0-254>] show localcrbt show localgk show localgw show localinfo [index <0-3>] show log print run pid <string:1-64> show log print type <operate|run|all> show log run pid <string:1-64> show log type <operate|run|all> show login snmp manager show logserverinfo show mfpstop overtime show mg [domainname <string:1-31>] show mpu show mrainfo show newserviceright priorlevel <default|normal|advanced|super> show nfs type bill show nirc prefix show numbermap [by <inner|extern>] startindex <0-4999> show numbermap [by <inner|extern>] [num <string:1-24>] [from <string:1-... show numdeal show office selectcode [no <0-254>]
2-14
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)

show office [no <0-254>] show otmn [dn <string:1-16>] show pbxgroup show peercomponent [domainname <string:1-31>] show peerconninfo [localindex <0-3>] [peername <string:1-30>] show pickupgroup [no <0-254>] show portalurl show potscp dtmf send show pra bearercapability flag show pra huawei show pra pseudo alerting mode show pralink [linkno <0-255>] show predeal [index <0-1023>]
show prefix callcategory <basic|new|in|sin|vu|ivr|card|intess> show prefix [dn <string:1-15>] show protocol <at0|cassignal|pra|sip|h323> [officeno <0-254>] show protocol h323 information show pstndeal [dn <string:1-15>] show radius chargecalled switch show radius chargeinterval show radius chargetransfer switch show radius regtransfer switch show radius resendinfo show radius switch show register report [id <0-254>] show register send [id <0-254>] show remotegk show replacenum [oldnumber <string:1-24>] show reservedcircuit officeno <0-254> [protocol <pra|cassignal|isup|sip>] show ringrelate [no <0-255>] show ringservice [dn <string:1-24>] show ringtype [no <0-254>] show routeanalysis [officeselectcode <0-254>] [callsourceno <0-255>] [o... show routeandoffice show routefaildeal [no <0-254>] show rtcp parameter show rtcp parameter default show rtcp statinfo office <0-256> [caller <string:1-24>] [called <strin... show runlog info show runlog mgwinfo show running time show seatno mid <1-253> [number <1-8>] show sip parameter show sip silenceofftofax switch show sip waitdial timer show siplocalgenerate show sipselect [prefix1 <string:1-15>] show sipue part startnum <3-1037> show sipue [eid <string:1-31>] show snmp manager [ip <a.b.c.d>] show sntpclient status show sntpserver status show softargu show soundlight alarm show specialnum
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
2-15

show sptfile relation show staticgw show statpara show statswitch show subbox version [slot <1-4>] show subbox [no <1-4>] show subscriber by callsourceno <0-255> show subscriber by pbxgroupno <0-49> show subscriber by pickupgroupno <0-254> show subscriber by voipdomainid <0-254> show subscriber directdail
show subscriber dn <string:1-16> type <basic|bill|newservice|all> show subscriber domainname <string:1-31> show subscriber filter [usertype <normal|prior|operator>] [outgoingrigh... show subscriber mpu show subscriber part startnum <0-1502> show subscriber pots show subscriber sortby dn [type <ascending|droping>] show subscriber state <idle|busy|block|fault|maintain|test|offline|lock... show subscriber subbox no <1-4> show subscriber unicall activated show subscriber unicall activated part startno <0-1502> show subscriber unicall dn <string:1-16> show subscriber [dn <string:1-16>] show system clocksource information show system crcx connectmode switch show system foip t38 show system foip vbd show system information show system media consult switch show system mgcp device show system moip show system time show system voip argu algo <g711|g729|g723> show tdmintesstimer show telephonegroup [groupno <0-63>] show telephonist [telephonegroupno <0-63>] show tgld [callsourceno <0-255>] [officeno <0-254>] [protocol <at0bidir... show timeindex [no <0-63>] show timerinfo pid <string:1-64> [timergroup <0-255>] [timerindex <0-255>] show tkc domainname <string:1-31> show tkc office no <0-254> show tkc slot <1-4> portinboard <0-3> [number <1-4>] [ts <0-31>] show tkc slot <1-4> [tkcno <list(0-127)>] show tkc [tkcno <list(0-127)>] show topo area <string:1-32> group <string:1-32> show trace task [no <0-4294967295>] show trunkgroup [no <0-2294>] show trunkport property slot <1-4> portinboard <0-3> [number <1-4>] show trunkport status slot <1-4> portinboard <0-3> [number <1-4>] show umsctrxshtnum flag show uppergk show version [slot <1-4>] show voipdomain [name <string:1-32>] show vp
2-16
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)

show wakeup record [dn <string:1-16>] show wakeup timersetting show workingtime show zone canceldatabreak addr <0-0x4fffffff> [ task <0-0xffffffff> ] clear
databreak addr <0-0x4fffffff> len <0-0x10000> attr <ro|wo|rw> [ task <0... display cpchannel cpno <0-254> display cpstation by cpno <0-254> display fpchannel fpno <0-254> display fpstation by fpno <0-254> display vpchannel vpno <0-254> display vpstation by vpno <0-254> enable exit help list [string <parastr>] modify session [outputmode <normal|gui>] [topostatus <disable|enable>] ... ping [ -count <1-65535>] [ -waittime <1-255>] [ -ttl <1-255>] <a.b.c.d> quit save set idle-timeout <0-30000> show history show idle-timeout show net alarm [type <network|am|mra|cti|vp|vmm|cp|conference|fp|sipue|... terminal length <0-512> who who am i
To view the command including subscriber, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> list string subscriber Command List show centrex subscriber centrexgroupno <0-49> show subscriber by callsourceno <0-255> show subscriber by pbxgroupno <0-49> show subscriber by pickupgroupno <0-254> show subscriber by voipdomainid <0-254> show subscriber directdail show subscriber dn <string:1-16> type <basic|bill|newservice|all> show subscriber domainname <string:1-31> show subscriber filter [usertype <normal|prior|operator>] [outgoingrigh... show subscriber mpu show subscriber part startnum <0-1502> show subscriber pots show subscriber sortby dn [type <ascending|droping>] show subscriber state <idle|busy|block|fault|maintain|test|offline|lock... show subscriber subbox no <1-4> show subscriber unicall activated show subscriber unicall activated part startno <0-1502> show subscriber unicall dn <string:1-16> show subscriber [dn <string:1-16>]
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
2-17
Related Commands
None.
2.3.3 show history

Function
This command is used to view the history.
Syntax
show history
Modes
View.
Parameters
None.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to show the latest 19 history commands.
Examples
To view the history, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show history History Command --------------show cliuser
Related Commands
None.
2-18
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3 Configuration Commands
3
About This Chapter
Configuration Commands
This chapter describes the functions, syntax, parameters, modes, usage guidelines, examples, and related commands of the configuration commands of the UAP2100. You can get familiar with each configuration command by reading this chapter.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-1
3.1 config add am

Function
The command is used to add the information about active and standby AMs in the case of stacking for the communications between the UAP and AMs.
Syntax
config add am no <0-3> ip <A.B.C.D> port <1024-65535>
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <0-3> ip <A.B.C.D> port <1024-65535> Description Indicates the number of the AM. Indicates the IP address of the AM. Indicates the port number of the AM, which is consistent with that configured in the AM configuration file. Default Value None None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
When the AM has active and standby management modules, the connection information about active and standby AMs need to be configured on the UAP. If there is only one AM module, you only need to configure the connection information about an AM. To avoid the situation that both active and standby CTIs are faulty and the active and standby AMs cannot work normally, you can configure the connection information about two disaster redundancy (DR) AMs whose serial numbers are 2 and 3. Only four AM connections can be stored in the database. The UAP selects the AM whose group number is 0 in priority.
Examples
Configure the connection information about one AM, with the IP address of 192.168.1.100 and port number of 6553.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add am no 0 ip 192.168.1.100 port 6553
Related Commands
config delete am show aminfo
3.2 config add anonymouscall

Function
The command is used to add the anonymous call information, such as the office direction number and maxcallnum.
Syntax
config add anonymouscall officeno <0-254> maxcallnum <0-254>
Parameters
Parameter and Value officeno <0-254> maxcallnum <0-254> Description Indicates the number of the office direction of the anonymous call. Indicates the maximum number of anonymous calls. Default Value None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The function of anonymous call can be implemented when the officeno and maxcallnum parameters are added.
Examples
Run the following command to add the information about the anonymous call by setting the number of the office direction to 0 and setting the number of maximum calls to 30:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add anonymouscall officeno 0 maxcallnum 30
Related Commands
show anonymouscall config delete anonymouscall
3.3 config add batch sipue

Function
The command is used to add SIP UEs in batch.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-3
Syntax
config add batch sipue seid <string> authorizationtype <noauth | authbyip | authbyeid | authbyeidandip> [ip <a.b.c.d>] [password <string>] [step <1-1000>] [number <1-1024>][ispca <yes | no>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value seid <string> authorizationtype <noauth | authbyip | authbyeid | authbyeidandip> Description Indicates the start equipment ID. At present, only digits are supported. Indicates the authentication type. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None None
noauth: no authentication. authbyip: authentication based on IP. authbyeid: authentication based on ID. authbyeidandip: authentication based on IP address and ID. None None 1 1 None
ip <a.b.c.d> password <string> step <1-1000> number <1-1024> Ispca <yes | no>
Indicates the IP address. Indicates the password. Indicates the interval between two consecutive equipment IDs. Indicates the number of pieces of equipment to be added. Indicates whether it is a PCA subscriber.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
This command is applicable to the case that the values of step are the same, and the values of authorization type are the same. For the following two authentication types based on IP , you do not need to set the parameter IP.

authentication based on ID authentication based on IP address and ID
For the following two authentication types, you do not need to set the parameter password.
No authentication
3-4
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)

Authentication based on IP
For the authentication based on IP, you need to set the IP address.
Examples
Run the following command to add SIP UEs in batch with seid as 1234, authorizationtype as noauth, and number as 10.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add batch sipue seid 1234 authorizationtype noauth number 10
Related Commands
config modify batch sipue config delete batch sipue show sipue
3.4 config add callpurview

Function
The command is used to add the call purview.
Syntax
config add callpurview k <0-9> purview <inter&local&localtoll&nationaltoll&internationaltoll&tonesupervision>
Parameters
Parameter and Value k <0-9> purview <inter&local&localtoll& nationaltoll& internationaltoll& tonesupervision> Description Indicates the outgoing call purview item. Indicates the call purview. The parameter has the following value options:

inter: intra-office call local: local call localtoll: local toll call nationaltoll: national toll call internationaltoll: international toll call tonesupervision: superviosn call
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-5
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The outgoing call purview item is used when the subscriber registers the service at the phone side. By default, the system sets the value of k to 1 to 3.
Examples
To add the call purview inter and local for a call with numbernetwork as 1 and k as 4, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add callpurview numbernetwork 1 k 4 purview inter&local
After the command is run successfully, if the subscriber set the value of k to 4 when registering the outgoing call purview service, the system limits the call purview of the phone to inter and local.
Related Commands
config modify callpurview config delete callpurview show callpurview
3.5 config add callsource

Function
The command is used to add a call source.
Syntax
config add callsource no <0-255>
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <0-255> Description Indicates the number of the call source. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
3-6
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to add a call source.
Examples
To add a call source with no as 1, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add callsource no 1
Related Commands
config delete callsource show callsourceno
3.6 config add card slot type atu

Function
The command is used to add a UAP-8AT0 card.
Syntax
config add card slot <1-4> type atu officeno <0-254>
Parameters
Parameter and Value slot <1-4> officeno <0-254> Description Indicates the slot number. Indicates the office number. Default Value None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The UAP-8AT0 is an analog trunk card that provides eight AT0 interfaces. Before you add a UAP-8AT0 card, ensure that the office exists and the slot number is not configured; otherwise, the UAP-8AT0 cannot be added. If the office does not exist, you can use the config add office command to add an office or the show office command to query the existing office.
Examples
To add a UAP-8AT0 card in slot 3 with officeno as 3, run the following command:
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-7
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add card slot 3 type atu officeno 3
Related Commands
config modify at0tkc card slot portinboard config delete card show device show card
3.7 config add card slot type dtu

Function
This command is used to add the UAP-2DTU digital trunk card.
Syntax
config add card slot <1-4> type dtu officeno <0-254>
Parameters
Parameter and Value slot <1-4> officeno <0-254> Description Indicates the slot number. Indicates the office number of the E1 port. Default Value None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines

Before you add an E1 digital trunk card, ensure that the office exists and the slot number is not configured; otherwise, the E1 digital trunk card cannot be added. If the office does not exist, you can use the config add office command to add an office or the show office command to query the existing office. After you add the UAP-2DTU, the signaling type of the E1 port is PRA by default. To change the signaling type, run the command config modify card slot type trunkport.
Examples
To add a UAP-2DTU card on slot 1, and set the office direction to 0, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add card slot 1 type dtu officeno 0
3-8
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Related Commands
config delete card show card config modify card slot type eus trunkport
3.8 config add cassignal

Function
The command is used to add a unique channel associated signaling type to the system.
Format
config add cassignal casname <string> castype <itu | china | brazil | chile> linetype <line | pulse> registertype <mfc | mfp> lrptindex <0-254> lsndindex <0-254> regrptindex <0-254> regsndindex <0-254> needbgroupsignal <yes | no>
Parameters
Parameter and Value casname <string> castype <itu | china | brazil | chile> Description Indicates the name of channel associated signaling. Indicates the type of signaling standard. The options are as follows:

itu: standard ITU-T R2 signaling china: China No.1 siganaling brazil: Brazil R2 signaling chile: Chile R2 signaling None line: digital line mode pulse: pulse mode None mfc: multi-frequency register mode mfp: pulse mode None None None
linetype <line | pulse>
Indicates the type of line signaling.

registertype <mfc | mfp>
Indicates the type of register signaling.

lrptindex <0-254> lsndindex <0-254> regrptindex <0-254>
Indicates a line signaling reporting adaptation index. Indicates a line signaling sending adaptation index. Indicates a register signaling reporting adaptation index.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-9
Parameter and Value regsndindex <0-254> needbgroupsignal <yes | no>
Description Indicates a register signaling sending adaptation index. Indicates whether to use the group B signaling.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To define a type of channel associated signaling, with casname as r2_2bit_mfc, lrptindex as 1, lsndindex as 1, regrptindex as 2, regsndindex as 2, and needbgroupsignal as yes, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add cassignal casname r2_2bit_mfc castype itu linetype line registertype mfc lrptindex 1 lsnd 1 regrpindex 2 regsndindex 2 needbgroupsignal yes
Related Commands
config delete cassignal config modify cassignal show cassignal
3.9 config add cp

Function
The command is used to add a conference peripheral (CP) and configure the properties of the CP.
Syntax
config add cp cpno <0-254> e1portno <0-7> slotno <1-4> slote1no <0-3>
Parameters
Parameter and Value cpno <0-254> Description Indicates the number of the CP. Default Value None
3-10
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameter and Value e1portno <0-7> slotno <1-4> slote1no <0-3>
Description Indicates the number of the E1 port on the CP voice card. Indicates the slot number of the board used to connect the UAP to the CP. Indicates the number of the E1 port that connects the UAP to the CP.
Default Value None None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Before running this command, you need to configure the number of the UAP. Also, the license for the basic gateway function of the UAP takes effect.
Examples
Add a CP for connecting to the UAP, with the CP number of 10, E1 card port number of 0. Also, E1 port 0 in slot 1 of the UAP is connected to the CP.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add cp cpno 10 e1portno 0 slotno 1 slote1no 0
Related Commands
config delete cp config modify cp show cp display cp by display cpchannel
3.10 config add cti

Function
The command is used to add the information about active and standby CTIs for the communications between the UAP and CTIs.
Syntax
config add cti no <0-3> ip <A.B.C.D> port <1024-65535>
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-11
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <0-3> ip <A.B.C.D> port <1024-65535> Description Indicates the number of the CTI. Indicates the IP address of the CTI. Indicates the port number of the CTI. Default Value None None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
When active and standby CTIs exist, you need to configure the information about the connections between the UAP and the two CTIs. If only one CTI exists, you need to configure the connection information about this CTI only.
Examples
Add the connection information about one CTI, with the IP address of 192.168.1.100 and port number of 5600.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add cti no 0 ip 192.168.1.100 port 5600
Related Commands
config delete cti show ctinfo
3.11 config add fp

Function
The command is used to add a fax peripheral (FP) and configure the properties of the FP.
Syntax
config add fp fpno <0-254> e1portno <0-1> slotno <1-4> slote1no <0-3>
Parameters
Parameter and Value fpno <0-254> e1portno <0-1> Description Indicates the number of the FP. Indicates the number of the E1 port on the FP voice card. Default Value None None
3-12
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameter and Value slotno <1-4> slote1no <0-3>
Description Indicates the slot number of the board used to connect the UAP to the CP. Indicates the number of the E1 port that connects the UAP to the FP.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Examples
Add an FP for connecting to the UAP, with the FP number of 10, E1 card port number of 0. Also, E1 port 0 in slot 1 of the UAP is connected to the FP.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add fp fpno 10 e1portno 0 slotno 1 slote1no 0
Related Commands
config delete fp config modify fp show fp display fp by display fpchannel
3.12 config add hostprefix

Function
This command is used to add an analysis prefix of the calling number.
Syntax
config add hostprefix dn <string> cldindex <0-63> minlen <0-15> maxlen <0-15>
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-13
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> Description Indicates an analysis prefix of the calling number. Its value contains a maximum of 15 digits. Indicates a called number change index. Indicates the minimum length of the number that the prefix matches. Indicates the maximum length of the number that the prefix matches. Default Value None
cldindex <0-63> minlen <0-15> maxlen <0-15>
None None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
After an analysis prefix of the calling number is added, the call center can monitor the call that is initiated by the calling number and change the called number. Before adding an analysis prefix of the calling number, you need to add the corresponding called number change index.
Examples
The analysis prefix of the calling number to be added is 10. The called number change index to which this prefix corresponds is 1. The minimum length of the number that the prefix matches is 4 digits. The maximum length is 6 digits. To be specific, the calling number that the prefix matches starts with 10 and the length of the calling number ranges from 4 digits to 6 digits. To add the analysis prefix 10 of the calling number, run the following command.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add hostprefix dn 10 cldindex 1 minlen 4 maxlen 6
Related Commands
config modify hostprefix config delete hostprefix show hostprefix config add predeal
3.13 config add line report

Function
The command is used to add line signaling reporting adaptation data.
3-14
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Format
config add line report id <0-254> physicsevent <0-254> para <0-15> callstate <0-254> logicevent <0-254>
Parameters
Parameter and Value id <0-254> physicsevent <0-254> para <0-15> callstate <0-254> logicevent <0-254> Description Indicates a reporting adaptation index. Indicates the type of a physical signal. Indicates a physical signal parameter. Indicates a call state. Indicates a logical signal. Default Value None None None None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To add the line signaling reporting adaptation data with the requirement that the logical event to which line signal 010 received on the outgoing trunk in the ringing state corresponds is a response signal, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add line report id 1 physicsevent 0 para 4 callstate 0 logicevent 0
Related Commands
config delete line report show line report
3.14 config add line send

Function
The command is used to add line signaling sending adaptation data.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-15
Format
config add line send id <0-254> logicevent <0-254> physicsevent <0-254> para1 <0-254> para2 <0-254> [para3 <0-254>] [para4 <0-254>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value id <0-254> logicevent <0-254> physicsevent <0-254> para1 <0-254> para2 <0-254> para3 <0-254> para4 <0-254> Description Indicates a sending adaptation index. Indicates logical signal. Indicates the type of a physical signal. Indicates physical parameter 1. Indicates physical parameter 2. Indicates physical parameter 3. Indicates physical parameter 4. Default Value None None None None None None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To add line signaling sending adaptation data, with the requirement that the physical command to which the line signaling seizing signal with id as 1 corresponds is sending line code 0001 and the signaling is held for 100ms, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add line send id 1 logicevent 3 physicsevent 0 para1 1 para2 10
Related Commands
config delete line send show line send
3.15 config add localseat

Function
The command is used to add local seats to the UAP. You can configure number allocation in batches.
3-16
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Syntax
config add localseat dn <string> [number <1-30>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> number <1-30> Description Indicates start and end seat numbers. Indicates the number of offset seats (allocated numbers). Default Value None 1
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The UAP in the current version cannot check the validity of seat numbers. Therefore, you need to ensure the reliability of the data during configuration. If you do not enter the number parameter, a seat is added by default.
Examples
Configure the seat numbers of the UAP by allocating 10 consecutive seat numbers starting from 8000.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add localseat dn 8000 number 10
Related Commands
config delete localseat show seatno
3.16 config add logserver

Function
The command is used to configure the IP address of the UAP log server.
Syntax
config add logserver ip <A.B.C.D> port <1024-65535>
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-17
Parameters
Parameter and Value ip <A.B.C.D> port <1024-65535> Description Indicates the IP address of the UAP log server. Indicates the port number of the UAP log server. Default Value None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
Add a log server, with the IP address of 192.168.1.100 and port number of 5600.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add logserver ip 192.168.1.100 port 5600
Related Commands
config delete logserver show logserverinfo
3.17 config add mg

Function
The command is used to add the information about the Media Gateway (MG) and set the attribute of the MG.
Syntax
config add mg domainname <string> ip <A.B.C.D> usernum <1-1024> [protocol <mgcp | h248 | h323>] [mgport <1000-6000>] [mgcport <1000-6000>] [rfc2833 <no | yes>] [codetype <g711a&g711u&g729&g723>] [heartbeat <yes | no>] [heartbeatperiod <5-255>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value domainname <string> ip <A.B.C.D> Description Indicates the domain name of the MG. Indicates the IP address of the MG. Default Value None None
3-18
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameter and Value usernum <1-1024> protocol <mgcp | h248 | h323>
Description Indicates the port number of the MG, that is the user numbers that the MG can bear. Indicates the protocol between the UAP2100 and the MG.The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None mgcp
MGCP H.248 H.323 2427 2727 g711a&g711u&g 729&g723
mgport <1000-6000> mgcport <1000-6000> codetype <g711a&g711u&g729& g723>
Indicates the port number of the MG. Indicates the port number of the UAP2100. Indicates the coding and decoding type of the MG.The parameter has the following value options:

G.711a G.711 G.729 G.723 no None None
rfc2833 <no | yes> heartbeat <yes | no> heartbeatperiod <5-255>
Indicates whether rfc2833 is added. Indicates the heartbeat switch. Indicates the heartbeat cycle time.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The domain name and the IP address the MG cannot be same to that of the other devices. The attribute of the MG, such as the domain name, the IP address and mgport, must be same to that of the MG side.
Examples
Run the following command to add a MG with domainname as ag232, ip as 192.168.0.232, usernum as 32, protocol as MGCP, mgport as 2427, mgcport as 2727, codetype as g711a, and rfc2833 as no.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add mg domainname ag232 ip 192.168.0.232 usernum 32 protocol mgcp mgport 2427 mgcport 2727 codetype g711a
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-19
Related Commands
config delete mg config modify mg domainname config modify mg ip show mg
3.18 config add mpu type at0 officeno

Function
This command is used to add an AT0 card accompanying with the MPU main board.
Syntax
config add mpu type at0 officeno <0-254>
Parameters
Parameter and Value officeno <0-254> Description Indicates the office number. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
This command is used to add an AT0 card accompanying with the MPU main board. Before you add an AT0 card, ensure that the office exists and the slot number is not configured; otherwise, the AT0 card cannot be added. If the office does not exist, you can use the config add office command to add an office or the show office command to query the existing office.
Examples
To add an AT0 card accompanying with the MPU main board with officeno as 3, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add mpu type at0 officeno 3
Related Commands
config modify at0tkc mpu portinboard show at0tkc mpu
3-20
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
config isolate mpu config delete mpu type at0
3.19 config add mra

Function
This command is used to add an MRA.
Syntax
config add mra no <0-1> ip <A.B.C.D> port <1024-65535>
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <0-1> ip <A.B.C.D> port <1024-65535> Description Indicates the sequence number of the MRA. Indicates the IP address of the MRA. Indicates the port number of the MRA. Default Value None None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To add an MRA, with the sequence number of 0, IP address of 192.168.1.100, and port number of 9600, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add mra no 0 ip 192.168.1.100 port 9600
Related Commands
config delete mra show mrainfo
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-21
3.20 config add nfs

Function
The command is used to add a network file server (NFS). The NFS can connect to the UAP2100 to store the voice playing files and voice recording files. Alternatively, the NFS can connect to the UAP2100 to store the call detail record (CDR) files required by the traffic statistics function of the UAP2100 trunk.
Syntax
config add nfs type <bmrs nfsno<0-1> | bill uid <0-65535> gid <0-65535>> nfsip <A.B.C.D> remotedir <string> localdir <string>
Parameters
Parameter and Value type <bmrs | bill> Description Indicates the type of an NFS. The values are as follows:
Default Value None
bmrs: indicates an NFS that stores the voice playing files and voice recording files. bill: indicates an NFS that stores CDR files. None
nfsno <0-1>
Indicates the number of an NFS. Up to two NFSs of the bmrs type can be configured.
nfsip <A.B.C.D> remotedir <string>
Indicates the IP address of an NFS. Indicates the remote shared directory of an NFS. The value is a string consisting of up to 64 characters.
None None
localdir <string>
Indicates the local drive letter mapping the remote shared directory of an NFS. The value can be a letter ranging from b to z. Indicates the value of UserID in the connection properties of an NFS. The value is used in the NFS connection authentication.
None
uid <0-65535>
None
gid <0-65535>
Indicates the value of GroupID in the connection properties of an NFS. The value is used in the NFS connection authentication.
None
3-22
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
When configuring an NFS of the bmrs type, you do not need to set the uid and gid parameters, because the system automatically sets the two parameters to the default values 65534 and 65533, respectively.
Modes
Config
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
For the NFS, the IP address is 10.8.22.100, the remote shared directory is share, and the local drive letter mapping the remote shared directory is d.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add nfs type bmrs nfsno 0 nfsip 10.8.22.100 remotedir share localdir d
Add an NFS of the bill type. For the NFS, the IP address is 172.16.14.221, the remote shared directory is bill, and the local drive letter mapping the remote shared directory is y. Set uid to 65534, and set gid to 65533.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add nfs type bill nfsip 172.16.14.221 remotedir bill localdir y uid 65534 gid 65533
Related Commands
config modify nfs config delete nfs show nfs
3.21 config add nirc prefix

Function
The command is used to configure the network call routing prefix.
Syntax
config add nirc prefix no <1-128> dn <string>
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <1-128> Description Indicates the number of the network call routing prefix. Default Value None
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-23
Parameter and Value dn <string>
Description Indicates the network call routing prefix, 15 numbers at most.
Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
Network call centers consist of call center 1 and call center 2. The area code of call center 2 is 0755 and the access code of call center 2 is 1111. Configure the network call routing prefix from call center 1 to call center 2 as 07551111:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add nirc prefix no 1 dn 07551111
Related Commands
config delete nirc prefix show nirc prefix
3.22 config add numdeal

Function
The command is used to add prefixes to all the called numbers starting with a certain prefix.
Syntax
config add numdeal dn <string> numadd <string>
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> numadd <string> Description Indicates the called number prefix. Indicates the prefix to be added to the called number. Default Value None None
3-24
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
After the prefix is added to the called number, the call center system can change the called numbers starting with this prefix in a uniform manner.
Examples
Add the prefix 600 to a string of called numbers (ranging from 801 to 809) starting with the prefix 80, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add numdeal dn 80 numadd 600
Related Commands
config delete numdeal show numdeal
3.23 config add office

Function
The command is used to add an office direction.
Format
config add office no <0-254> officeselectcode <0-254> [charge <0-65534>] [timeindex <0-63>] [incomingright <inter | local | localtoll | ddd | idd>] [codetype <g711a&g711u&g729&g723>] [peerdevicename <string>] [carrierid <0-65534>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <0-254> officeselectcode <0-254> charge <0-65534> Description Indicates the number of the office direction. Indicates an office direction selection code. The value must be set in the system. Indicates the charge rate. If the charge rate policy is not adopted for the office direction selection code, the config add office command fails to be run when you enter the parameter. None Default Value None None
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-25
Parameter and Value timeindex<0-63>
Description Indicates the time index. If the time policy is not adopted for the office direction selection code, the config add office command fails to be run when you enter the parameter.
Default Value None
incomingright <inter | local | localtoll | ddd | idd>
Indicates the service attribute. The options are as follows:

None
inter: inter-office call local: local call localtoll: local toll call ddd: national toll call idd: international toll call None
codetype <g711a& g711u&g729&g723 >
Indicates the available voice encoding type. This parameter has the following value options:

G.711a G.711 G.729 G.723 None. 0
peerdevicename <string> carrierid <0-65534>
Indicates the peer device name. Indicates the carrierid ID, 0 indicates local carrier.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The office direction is the channel between the local office and the peer office. The switch connects with the neighboring network through the circuit trunk or the package trunk. These trunks belong to the office. By setting the prefix, the office can map the called number and choose the trunk circuit.
Examples
To add an office direction with the office direction number 2, run the following command. The office direction belongs to ODSC 1, and the time index is 5.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add office no 2 officeselectcode 1 timeindex 5
Related Commands
config delete office
config modify office show office
3.24 config add office selectcode

Function
The command is used to add office direction selection codes.
Format
config add office selectcode <0-254> [send2nddialtone <yes | no >] repeatroute <yes | no> [routefaildealno <0-254>] selecttype <none | timebase | chargebase | loadshare>
Parameters
Parameter and Value selectcode <0-254> send2nddialtone repeatroute <yes | no> routefaildealno <0-254> selecttype <timebase | chargebase | loadshare> Description Indicates an office direction selection code. Indicates whether to play the two-stage dialing tone. Indicates whether to support rerouting. Indicates the routing failure processing index. Indicates the policy for selecting an office direction. The options are as follows:

Default Value None No None None None
timebase: time based policy chargebase: charge rate based policy loadshare: load sharing based policy
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The routing failure processing index is used to support rerouting. When the active office direction fails to select a trunk link, the active office direction can find the selection link of the standby office direction automatically through the routing failure processing index.
Examples
To add ODSC 5, run the following command. The rerouting is not supported, and the policy for selecting the office is charge rate based.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add office selectcode 5 repeatroute no selecttype chargebase
Related Commands
config modify office selectcode config delete office selectcode show office selectcode
3.25 config add peercomponent

Function
The command is used to add a peer office device.
Syntax
config add peercomponent domainname <string> ip <A.B.C.D> tkcnum <1-256> [heartbeat <yes | no>] [heartbeatperiod <5-255>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value domainname <string> ip <A.B.C.D> tkcnum<1-256> heartbeat <yes | no> heartbeatperiod <5-255> Description Indicates the domain name of the peer office device. Indicates the IP address of the peer office device. Indicates the number of circuits distributed to the peer office device. Indicates the heartbeat switch. Indicates the heartbeat cycle time. Default Value None None None no 120
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The domain name of the peer office device cannot be conflict with that of the existing device; otherwise, the configuration fails. The IP address of the peer office must be same to that of the peer office side.
3-28
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Examples
To add a peer office device with domainname as ss152, ip as 192.168.0.152, and tkcnum as 256, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add peercomponent domainname ss152 ip 192.168.0.152 tkcnum 256
Related Commands
config modify peercomponent config delete peercomponent show peercomponent
3.26 config add pralink

Function
The command is used to add a PRA link.
Syntax
config add pralink linkno <0-255> slot <1-4> trunkport <0-3> [position <user | network>] [ts <0-31>] [sendrestart <yes | no>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value linkno <0-255> slot <1-4> trunkport <0-3> position <user | network> Description Indicates the PRA link number. Indicates the slot Number of the E1 board in the UAP2100. Indicates the port number of the E1 board in the UAP2100. Indicates the position. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None None None user
user: user side network: network side 16 no
ts <0-31> sendrestart <yes | no>
Indicates the time slot. Indicates whether to send a restart message.
Modes
Config.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-29
Usage Guidelines
For the UAP2100, the command can be run successfully only when the type of the board in the mapping slot position is the dtu. You can check the board type by running the show card command.
Examples
To add a PRA link at slot 2 with linkno as 200, trunkport as 1, and position as user, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add pralink linkno 200 slot 2 trunkport 1 position user
Related Commands
config delete pralink show pralink
3.27 config add predeal index changetype delete

Function
The command is used to add the index for changing the number.
Syntax
config add predeal index <0-1023> changetype delete changepos <0-23> changelen <1-24> [numbertype <international | national | subscriber>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value index <0-1023> changepos <0-23> changelen <1-24> numbertype <international | national | subscriber> Description Indicates the change index number Indicates the change position. Indicates the change length. Indicates the number type. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None None None None
international national subscriber
Modes
Config.
3-30
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To add a prefix index for changing the number with index as 4, changetype as delete, changepos as 0, and changelen as 1, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add predeal index 4 changetype delete changepos 0 changelen 1
Related Commands
config delete predeal show predeal
3.28 config add predeal index changetype insert

Function
Syntax
config add predeal index <0-63> changetype insert changepos <0-23> newdn <string> [numbertype <international | national | subscriber>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value index <0-63> changepos <0-23> newdn <string> numbertype <international | national | subscriber> Description Indicates the change index number. Indicates the change position. Indicates the new number of the subscriber. Indicates the number type. The parameter has the following value options:

Modes
Config.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-31
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To add a prefix index for changing the number with index as 2, changetype as insert, changepos as 0, newdn as 020, and numbertype as subscriber, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add predeal index 2 changetype insert changepos 0 newdn 020 numbertype subscriber
Related Commands
3.29 config add predeal index changetype modify

Function
Syntax
config add predeal index <0-1023> changetype modify changepos <0-23> changelen <1-24> newdn <string> [numbertype <international | national | subscriber>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value index <0-1023> changepos <0-23> changelen <1-24> newdn <string> numbertype <international | national | subscriber> Description Indicates the change index number. Indicates the change position. Indicates the change length. Indicates the new number of the subscriber. Indicates the number type. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None None None None None
Modes
Config.
3-32
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To add a prefix index for changing the number with index as 3, changetype as modify, changepos as 0, changelen as 1, and newdn as 2, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add predeal index 3 changetype modify changepos 0 changelen 1 newdn 2
Related Commands
3.30 config add prefix dn callcategory

Function
The command is used to add the prefix information, such as the call category, number transfer, the office number and the telephone group number.
Format
config add prefix dn <string> callcategory <basic | new | in | sin | vu | ivr | card > callattribute <umsleavemsgindon | umsleavemsgindoff | umsuserfaxnum | umsgetleavemsg | umsfaxuninum | inter | local | ddd | idd | emergency | modifypwd | apickupingroup | apickupspecial | calltelephonist | aabbrdial | consolepick | recordtone | cabbrdialall | playtone | cnsall | sdds | cdds | scfu | rccfu | ccfu | scfb | rccfb | ccfb | scfnr | rccfnr | ccfnr | sabbrdial | cabbrdial | swakeupcall | cwakeupcall | sabsentuser | cabsentuser | shotlined | chotlined | shotlinei | chotlinei | sautoredail | cautoredail | scallwait | ccallwait | scallback | ccallback | scallsave | ccallsave | scalllimit | ccalllimit | ssecretarysrv | csecretarysrv | ssecretarystation | csecretarystation | ssecretarysrvverify | csecretarystationverify | snightservice | cnightservice | telephonistreg | telephonistquit | telephonistdown | telephonistup | sremotecfb | cremotecfb | sremotecfnr | cremotecfnr | sremotecfu | cremotecfu | querydn | confattend | confisolate | conflistenonly | conflistentalk | conftalkonly | confkick | conftrigger | confterminate | vuconsole | vuconference | vuselfdefine | vutransfertelephonist | sfax | cfax | sotmnclip | cotmnclip | operatordisconnect | tonesupervision | operatorinsert | ssuperrightsuser | csuperrightsuser | svoicemailcfu | svoicemailcfb | svoicemailcfnr | sfaxmailcfu | cvoicemailcfu | cvoicemailcfb | cvoicemailcfnr | cfaxmailcfu | scfo | rccfo | ccfo | cardaccess | snp | cnp> cusattribute <null | cus1 | cus2 | cus3 | cus4 | cus5 | cus6 | cus7 | cus8 | cus9 | cus10 | cus11 | cus12 | cus13 | cus14 | cus15 |cus16 | cus17 |cus18 | cus19 | cus20 | cus21 | cus22 | cus23 | cus24 | cus25 | cus26 | cus27 | cus28 | cus29 | cus30 | cus31 | cus32> prefixcharge <yes | no> chargeindex <0-1023> cldpredeal <yes | no> [cldindex <0-1023>] [cldmap <yes | no>] [officeselectcode <0-254>] [minlen <0-24>] [maxlen <0-24>] [vug <4-59>] [telephonegroupno number] [clipredeal <yes | no>] [cliindex <0-1023>] [climap <yes | no>] [isautodial <yes | no>] [pbxgroup <0-49>] [uselongcli <yes | no>]
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-33
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> callcategory <basic | new | in | sin | vu | ivr | card> Description Indicates the prefix number. Indicates the call category. The options are as follows:

basic: basic service call new: new service call in: intelligent service call sin: call through the special access code vu: call through the virtual attendant ivr: call through an integrated virtual attendant card: card service call
3-34
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameter and Value callattribute <umsleavemsgindon | umsleavemsgindoff | umsuserfaxnum | umsgetleavemsg | umsfaxuninum | inter | local | ddd | idd | emergency | modifypwd | apickupingroup | apickupspecial | calltelephonist | aabbrdial | consolepick | recordtone | cabbrdialall | playtone | cnsall | sdds | cdds | scfu | rccfu | ccfu | scfb | rccfb | ccfb | scfnr | rccfnr | ccfnr | sabbrdial | cabbrdial | swakeupcall | cwakeupcall | sabsentuser | cabsentuser | shotlined | chotlined | shotlinei | chotlinei | sautoredail | cautoredail | scallwait | ccallwait | scallback | ccallback | scallsave | ccallsave | scalllimit | ccalllimit | ssecretarysrv | csecretarysrv | ssecretarystation | csecretarystation | ssecretarysrvverify | csecretarystationverify | snightservice | cnightservice | telephonistreg | telephonistquit | telephonistdown | telephonistup | sremotecfb | cremotecfb | sremotecfnr | cremotecfnr | sremotecfu | cremotecfu | querydn | confattend | confisolate | conflistenonly | conflistentalk | conftalkonly | confkick | conftrigger | confterminate | vuconsole | vuconference | vuselfdefine | vutransfertelephonist | sfax | cfax | sotmnclip | cotmnclip | operatordisconnect | tonesupervision |
Description Indicates the service attribute. The options are as follows:

Default Value None
umsleavemsgindon: the prefix for turning on the message indicator umsleavemsgindoff: the prefix for turning off the message indicator umsuserfaxnum: the prefix of the user fax number (One fax has one number.) umsgetleavemsg: the unified access number for obtaining messages umsfaxuninum: the unified access number for sending faxes inter: inter-office call local: local call ddd: national toll call idd: international toll call emergency: emergency call modifypwd: change password apickupingroup: co-group pickup service apickupspecial: specified pickup service calltelephonist: call attendant position aabbrdial: abbreviated dialing consolepick: call waiting for attendant position recordtone: record cabbrdialall: cancel all abbreviated dialing playtone: play voice cnsall: cancel all registered supplementary service sdds: set no disturbance service cdds: cancel no disturbance service scfu: set unconditional call forwarding rccfu: remotely cancel unconditional call forwarding ccfu: cancel unconditional call forwarding scfb: set call forwarding busy rccfb: remotely cancel call forwarding busy ccfb: cancel call forwarding busy

scfnr: set call forwarding no reply operatorinsert | rccfnr: remotely cancel call forwarding ssuperrightsuser | Issue 01 (2010-11-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential no reply csuperrightsuser | Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. svoicemailcfu | ccfnr: cancel call forwarding no reply svoicemailcfb | sabbrdial: set abbreviated dialing svoicemailcfnr | cabbrdial: cancel abbreviated dialing sfaxmailcfu |
3-35
Parameter and Value cusattribute <null | cus1 cus32> cldpredeal <yes | no> cldindex <0-1023> officeselectcode <0-254> cldmap <yes | no> minlen <0-24>
Description Indicates the customized attribute of the subscriber at level 32. Indicates whether to change the called number. Indicates the index number for changing the called number. Indicates an office direction selection code. Indicates whether to perform the number mapping for the called number. Indicates the minimum length of the number when using it to locate the called party. Indicates the maximum length of the number when using it to locate the called party. Indicates whether to perform the number mapping for the calling number. Indicates the vug number. Indicates the number of the telephone group. The number is from 0 to 63. Indicates whether to change the calling number. Indicates the index number for changing the calling number. Indicates whether to auto-dial. Indicates the PBX group number. Indicates whether to change the short number with the long number for a caller.
Default Value None None None None None None
maxlen <0-24>
None
climap <yes | no> vug <4-59> telephonegroupno number clipredeal <yes | no> cliindex <0-1023> isautodial <yes | no> pbxgroup <0-49> uselongcli <yes | no>
None None None None None no None no
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
When configuring an out-going prefix, that is, the call is a local call, national toll call, or international toll call, you must enter the office direction code.
3-36
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)

When configuring an intra-office prefix, you must enter the minimum number length. You are advised to configure the minimum number length to be the same as the maximum number length.
Examples
To add the prefix information with dn as 112, callcategory as basic, callattribute as local, cldpredeal as yes, cldindex as 2, and officeselectcode as 2, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add prefix dn 112 callcategory basic callattribute local cldpredeal yes cldindex 2 officeselectcode 2 minlen 2
Related Commands
config modify prefix config delete prefix show prefix
3.31 config add prefix intess

Function
The command is used to configure the call center prefix.
Syntax
config add prefix dn <string> callcategory intess callattribute inter cldpredeal <yes | no> [cldindex <0-1023>] [minlen <0-24>] [maxlen <0-24>] [telephonegroupno <0-63>] [clipredeal <yes | no>] [cliindex <0-1023>] [isautodial <yes | no>] [pbxgroup <0-49>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> cldpredeal <yes | no> cldindex <0-1023> minlen <0-24> Description Indicates the prefix. Indicates whether the called number is changed. Indicates that the index of the called number is changed. Indicates the minimum length of the telephone number used to locate the called party. Indicates the maximum length of the telephone number used to locate the called party. Indicates the console group number. Default Value None None None None
maxlen <0-24>
None
telephonegroupno <0-63>
None
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-37
Parameter and Value clipredeal <yes | no> cliindex <0-1023> isautodial <yes | no> pbxgroup <0-49>
Description Indicates whether the calling number is changed. Indicates that the index of the calling number is changed. Indicates whether to enable automatic two-stage dialing. Indicates the number of the PBX group.
Default Value None None no None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
Add the call center prefix of 6688, with no number changed:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add prefix dn 6688 callcategory intess callattribute inter cldpredeal no
Related Commands
config add prefix config modify prefix config delete prefix show prefix
3.32 config add pstndeal

Function
This command is used to add the rule for handling a special direct-dialing number.
Syntax
config add pstndeal dn <string> cldindex <0-63>
3-38
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> cldindex <0-63> Description Indicates a special direct-dialing number. Its value contains a maximum of 15 digits. Indicates a called number change index. Default Value None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Before adding a special direct-dialing number, you need to add the corresponding called number change index.
Examples
To add a special direct-dialing number 123456, with the corresponding number change index of 1, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add pstndeal dn 123456 cldindex 1
Related Commands
config delete pstndeal show pstndeal config add predeal
3.33 config add reanalysis prefix

Function
The command is used to add a prefix for the number re-analysis.
Syntax
config add reanalysis prefix dn <string> callattribute <local | ddd | idd | vuconference> [cldpredeal <yes | no>] [cldindex <0-1023>] [clipredeal <yes | no>] [cliindex <0-1023>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> Description Indicates the prefix number. Default Value None
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-39
Parameter and Value callattribute <local | ddd | idd | vuconference>
Description Indicates the call attribute.The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None
local: local call ddd: national toll call idd: international toll call vuconference: connecting virtual subscribers to a conference None None None None
cldpredeal <yes | no> cldindex <0-63> clipredeal <yes | no> cliindex <0-63>
Indicates whether to change the called number. Indicates the index for changing the called number. Indicates whether to change the calling number. Indicates the index for changing the calling number.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
If cldpredeal is set to yes, you must set the value of cldindex. If clipredeal is set to yes, you must set the value of cliindex. The parameter of cldindex and cliindex must be the existing change index.
Examples
To add a number re-analysis prefix with dn as 012, callattribute as idd, cldindex as yes, cldindex as 2, clipredeal as yes, and cliindex as 3, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add reanalysis prefix dn 012 callattribute idd cldpredeal yes cldindex 2 clipredeal yes cliindex 3
Related Commands
config modify reanalysis prefix show prefix
3-40
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3.34 config add ringrelate

Function
The command is used to add an index of a ring type related to the protocol.
Syntax
config add ringrelate no <0-255> protocol <mgcp | h248 | sip | bicc | h323 | m2ua | axcp | ancp | potscp> [normal <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>] [centrex <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>] [silent <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>] [first <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>] [fsk <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>] [stop <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>] [user1 <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>] [user2 <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>] [user3 <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <0-255> Description Indicates the index number of the ring type. Default Value None
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-41
Parameter and Value protocol <mgcp | h248 | sip | bicc | h323 | m2ua | axcp | ancp | potscp>
Description Indicates the protocol type. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None
MGCP H.248 SIP BICC H.323 M2UA AXCP ANCP POTSCP None
normal <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>
Indicates the normal ring. The parameter has the following value options:

mgcpv5ring0 mgcpv5h248ring1 mgcpv5h248ring2 mgcpv5h248ring3 mgcpv5h248ring4 mgcpv5h248ring5 mgcpv5h248ring6 mgcph248ring7 h248ring8 h248ring9 h248ring10 h248ring11 h248ring12 h248ring13 v5h248ring14 h248ring15 v5firstring
3-42
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameter and Value centrex <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>
Description Indicates the Centrex ring. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None
mgcpv5ring0 mgcpv5h248ring1 mgcpv5h248ring2 mgcpv5h248ring3 mgcpv5h248ring4 mgcpv5h248ring5 mgcpv5h248ring6 mgcph248ring7 h248ring8 h248ring9 h248ring10 h248ring11 h248ring12 h248ring13 v5h248ring14 h248ring15 v5firstring None
silent <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>
Indicates the silent ring. The parameter has the following value options:

Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-43
Parameter and Value first <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>
Description Indicates the first ring. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None
fsk <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>
Indicates the FSK ring. The parameter has the following value options:

3-44
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameter and Value stop <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>
Description Indicates the special ring. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None
user1 <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>
Indicates the customized ring 1 of the user. The parameter has the following value options:

Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-45
Parameter and Value user2 <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>
Description Indicates the customized ring 2 of the user. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None

3-46
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to add an index of a ring type related to the protocol.
Examples
To add a ring type index related to the protocol with no as 3, protocol as MGCP, normal as v5firstring, and centrex as h248ring10, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add ringrelate no 3 protocol mgcp normal v5firstring centrex h248ring10
Related Commands
config modify ringrelate show ringrelate config delete ringrelate
3.35 config add ringservice

Function
The command is used to add the ring service.
Syntax
config add ringservice dn <string> type <parallel | serial> [num1 <string>] [num2 <string>] [num3 <string>] [num4 <string>] [num5 <string>] [num6 <string>] [num7 <string>] [num8 <string>] [num9 <string>] [num10 <string>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> type <parallel | serial> Description Indicates the number of the subscriber. Indicates the ring type. The parameter has the following value options:

parallel serial None None None
num1 <string> num2 <string> num3 <string>
Indicates the ring number 1. Indicates the ring number 2. Indicates the ring number 3.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-47
Parameter and Value num4 <string> num5 <string> num6 <string> num7<string> num8 <string> num9 <string> num10 <string>
Description Indicates the ring number 4. Indicates the ring number 5. Indicates the ring number 6. Indicates the ring number 7. Indicates the ring number 8. Indicates the ring number 9. Indicates the ring number 10.
Default Value None None None None None None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
For the parallel ring type, only two ring numbers can be configured. In this case, you must configure the ring number by using the parameters num1 and num; otherwise, the configuration fails. For the serial ring type, up to 10 ring numbers can be configured.
Examples
To add the parallel service for the subscriber with dn as 330001, num1 as 330010, and num2 as 330011, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add ringservice dn 330001 type serial num1 330010 num2 330011
Related Commands
config modify ringservice config delete ringservice show ringservice
3.36 config add ringtype

Function
The command is used to add an index of a ring type.
3-48
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Syntax
config add ringtype no <0-255> [callernumsendtype <outband | inband>] [inter<normalring | centrexring | silentring | firstring | fskring | stopring | userring1 | userring2 | userring3>] [local<normalring | centrexring | silentring | firstring | fskring | stopring | userring1 | userring2 | userring3>] [localtoll<normalring | centrexring | silentring | firstring | fskring | stopring | userring1 | userring2 | userring3>] [nationaltoll<normalring | centrexring | silentring | firstring | fskring | stopring | userring1 | userring2 | userring3>] [internationaltoll<normalring | centrexring | silentring | firstring | fskring | stopring | userring1 | userring2 | userring3>] [centrex<normalring | centrexring | silentring | firstring | fskring | stopring | userring1 | userring2 | userring3>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <0-255> callernumsendtype <outband | inband> Description Indicates the index number of the ring type. Indicates the sending type of the calling number. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None outband
outband inband normalring
inter<normalring | centrexring | silentring | firstring | fskring | stopring | userring1 | userring2 | userring3>
Indicates the ring type of the intra-office call. The parameter has the following value options:

normalring centrexring silentring firstring fskring stopring userring1 userring2 userring3 centrexring
local<normalring | centrexring | silentring | firstring | fskring | stopring | userring1 | userring2 | userring3>
Indicates the ring type of the local call. The parameter has the following value options:

normalring centrexring silentring firstring fskring stopring userring1 userring2 userring3
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-49
Parameter and Value localtoll<normalring | centrexring | silentring | firstring | fskring | stopring | userring1 | userring2 | userring3>
Description Indicates the ring type of the local toll call. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value normalring
normalring centrexring silentring firstring fskring stopring userring1 userring2 userring3 normalring
nationaltoll<normalring | centrexring | silentring | firstring | fskring | stopring | userring1 | userring2 | userring3>
Indicates the ring type of the national toll call. The parameter has the following value options:

normalring centrexring silentring firstring fskring stopring userring1 userring2 userring3 normalring
internationaltoll<normal ring | centrexring | silentring | firstring | fskring | stopring | userring1 | userring2 | userring3>
Indicates the ring type of the international toll call. The parameter has the following value options:

3-50
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameter and Value centrex<normalring | centrexring | silentring | firstring | fskring | stopring | userring1 | userring2 | userring3>
Description Indicates the ring type of the Centrex in-group call. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value centrexring
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to add a index of a ring type.
Examples
To add a ring type with no as 2, callernumsendtype as outband, inter as normalring, local as normalring, and localtoll as centrexring, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add ringtype no 2 callernumsendtype outband inter normalring local normalring localtoll centrexring
Related Commands
config modify ringtype config delete ringtype show ringtype
3.37 config add sipselect

Function
The command is used to add SIP trunk polling.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-51
Syntax
config add sipselect prefix1 <string> [prefix2 <string>] [prefix3 <string>] [prefix4 <string>] [prefix5 <string>] [prefix6 <string>] [prefix7 <string>] [prefix8 <string>] [prefix9 <string>] [prefix10 <string>] [prefix11 <string>] [prefix12 <string>] [prefix13 <string>] [prefix14 <string>] [prefix15 <string>] [prefix16 <string>] [method <poll>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value prefix1 <string> prefix2 <string> prefix3 <string> prefix4 <string> prefix5 <string> prefix6 <string> prefix7 <string> prefix8 <string> prefix9 <string> prefix10 <string> prefix11 <string> prefix12 <string> prefix13 <string> prefix14 <string> prefix15 <string> prefix16 <string> method <poll> Description Indicates configuring SIP trunk prefix 1. Indicates configuring SIP trunk prefix 2. Indicates configuring SIP trunk prefix 3. Indicates configuring SIP trunk prefix 4. Indicates configuring SIP trunk prefix 5. Indicates configuring SIP trunk prefix 6. Indicates configuring SIP trunk prefix 7. Indicates configuring SIP trunk prefix 8. Indicates configuring SIP trunk prefix 9. Indicates configuring SIP trunk prefix 10. Indicates configuring SIP trunk prefix 11. Indicates configuring SIP trunk prefix 12. Indicates configuring SIP trunk prefix 13. Indicates configuring SIP trunk prefix 14. Indicates configuring SIP trunk prefix 15. Indicates configuring SIP trunk prefix 16. Indicates the polling algorithm type. Only one type of algorithm is supported at present. Default Value None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None poll
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
When you add a SIP trunk polling record, the value of the prefix parameter to be configured must be the configured SIP trunk prefix. Otherwise, running this command fails.
3-52
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Examples
Add a SIP trunk polling record, with prefix 1 of 081, prefix 2 of 082, prefix 3 of 083, and prefix 16 of 084:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add sipselect prefix1 081 prefix2 082 prefix3 083 prefix16 084 method poll
Related Commands
config delete sipselect show sipselect
3.38 config add sipue

Function
The command is used to add a single SIP UE.
Syntax
config add sipue eid <string> authorizationtype <noauth | authbyip | authbyeid | authbyeidandip> [ip <a.b.c.d>] [password <string>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value eid <string> authorizationtype <noauth | authbyip> Description Indicates the ID of the equipment. This parameter value must be unique. Indicates the authentication type.

noauth: no authentication authbyip: authentication based on IP authbyeid:authentication based on ID. authbyeidandip:authentication based on IP address and ID. None None
ip <a.b.c.d> password <string>
Indicates the IP address. Indicates the password.
Modes
Config.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-53
Usage Guidelines
For the following two authentication types based on IP , you do not need to set the parameter IP.


No authentication Authentication based on IP
Examples
Run the following command to add an SIP UE with eid as 1234, and authorizationtype as noauth.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add sipue eid 1234 authorizationtype noauth
Related Commands
config modify sipue config delete sipue show sipue
3.39 config add staticgw

Function
The command is used to add a static gateway.
Syntax
config add staticgw <string> ip <a.b.c.d> signalport <1-65535> techprefix1 <string> [techprefix2 <string>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value staticgw <string> ip <a.b.c.d> signalport <1-65535> techprefix1 <string> techprefix2 <string> Description Indicates the name of the static gateway. Indicates the IP address. Indicates the signaling port number. Indicates the number prefix 1 of the gateway. Indicates the number prefix 2 of the gateway. Default Value None None None None None
3-54
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
Run the following command to add a static gateway with staticgw as gw, ip as 192.169.1.1, signalport as 1500, and techprefix1 as 12345.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add staticgw gw ip 192.169.1.1 signalport 1500 techprefix1 12345
Related Commands
config modify staticgw config delete staticgw show staticgw
3.40 config add subbox

Function
This command is used to add a subscriber box.
Syntax
config add subbox no <1-4>
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <1-4> Description Indicates the number of a subscriber box. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The subscriber box is used to expand the POTS interface of the UAP2100. Before you add a subscriber box, ensure that the number of the subscriber box is not used; otherwise, the subscriber box cannot be added.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-55
Examples
To add a subscriber box with no as 1, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add subbox no 1
Related Commands
show subbox config delete subbox
3.41 config add subscriber domainname

Function
The command is used to add a subscriber connected to the MG.
Syntax
config add subscriber domainname <string> dn <string> termprefix <string> [startprefixnum <string>] [startuserno <string>] [ringtypeindex <0-254>] [number <1-1024>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value domainname <string> dn <string> ringtypeindex<0-254> termprefix <string> startprefixnum <string> number <1-1024> startuserno <string> Description Indicates the domain name of the MG. Indicates the start subscriber number. Indicates the index of the ring type. Indicates the prefix of the terminal name of the subscriber. Indicates the start terminal number. Indicates the subscriber amount. Indicates the start subscriber number. That is the start port number on the MG. Default Value None None None None 0 1 0
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to add a subscriber connected to the MG. You can add a subscriber one time or add subscribers in batches.
3-56
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
The subscriber terminal name (consists of prefix of the terminal name and the terminal number) must be same to that of the MG side. The mapping port of the subscriber number must be free.
Examples
To add 10 subscribers for the MG with domainname as ag232, dn as 3000, termprefix as agw, and startprefixnum as 0, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add subscriber domainname ag232 dn 3000 termprefix agw startprefixnum 0 number 10
After running the show subscriber domainname ag232 command, you can see the added 10 subscribers. Their number is from 3000 to 3009, and their terminal name is from agw0 to agw9. To add three subscribers for the MG with domainname as ag232, dn as 3010, termprefix as agw, startprefixnum as 10, and startuserno as 10, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add subscriber domainname ag232 dn 3010 termprefix agw startprefixnum 10 startuserno 10 number 3
Related Commands
config delete subscriber config modify subscriber config show subscriber
3.42 config add subscriber eid

Function
The command is used to add SIP subscribers.
Syntax
config add subscriber eid <string> dn <string> [ringtypeindex <0-254>] [eidstep <1-1000>] [dnstep <1-1000>] [number <1-1024>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value eid <string> dn <string> ringtypeindex <0-254> Description Indicates the equipment ID of the start SIP UE. Indicates the number of the start SIP subscriber. Indicates the subscriber ring type. Default Value None None None
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-57
Parameter and Value eidstep <1-1000> dnstep <1-1000> number <1-1024>
Description Indicates the interval between two consecutive SIP UE equipment IDs. Indicates the interval between two SIP subscriber numbers. Indicates the number of subscribers to be added.
Default Value 1 1 1
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
This command is applicable to the case that the values of eidstep are the same, and the values of dnstep are the same.
Examples
Run the following command to add SIP subscribers in batch with eid as 1234, dn as 26100, eidstep as 2, dnstep as 2, and number as 10.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add subscriber eid 1234 dn 26100 eidstep 2 dnstep 2 num 10
Related Commands
config modify subscriber config delete subscriber
3-58
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3.43 config add subscriber mpu dn

Function
This command is used to add a POTS subscriber accompanying with the MPU main board.
Syntax
config add subscriber mpu dn <string> [startuserno <0-7>] [ringtypeindex <0-254>] [number <1-8>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> startuserno <0-7> ringtypeindex <0-254> number <1-8> Description Indicates the start subscriber number. Indicates the start serial number of the subscriber. Indicates the index of the ring type. Indicates the subscriber amount. Default Value None 0 None 8
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
This command is used to add a POTS subscriber accompanying with the MPU main board. You can set a maximum of eight subscribers. startuserno is not mandatory.
Examples
To add two subscribers at a time with dn as 6000, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add subscriber mpu dn 6000 number 2
To add two subscribers with dn as 6000 and startuserno as 3, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add subscriber mpu dn 6000 startuserno 3 number 2
Related Commands
config delete subscriber mpu show subscriber
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-59
3.44 config add subscriber subbox

Function
This command is used to add a POTS subscriber of the subscriber box.
Syntax
config add subscriber subbox no <1-4> dn <string> [startuserno <0-31>] [number <1-32>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <1-4> dn <string> startuserno <0-31> number <1-32> Description Indicates the number of the subscriber box. Indicates the start subscriber number. Indicates the start serial number of the subscriber. Indicates the subscriber amount. Default Value None None 0 32
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
number is mandatory if you add 32 subscribers at a time. Before you add a subscriber box, ensure that the subscriber box exists and the subscriber number is not configured. You can use the show subbox command to query the existing subscriber box. If the subscriber box does not exist, you can use the config add subbox command to add a subscriber box.
Examples
To add 32 subscribers at a time with no as 1 and dn as 8000, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add subscriber subbox no 1 dn 8000 number 32
To add 10 subscribers at a time with no as 2, dn as 8050, and startuserno as 5, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add subscriber subbox no 2 dn 8050 startuserno 5 number 10
Related Commands
config add subbox
3-60
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3.45 config add tgld

Function
The command is used to add a relay bearer.
Syntax
config add tgld callsourceno <0-255> officeno <0-254> protocol <at0bidirection | cassignalbidirection | cassignaloutgoing | pra | sip | h323> prefix <string> [peerringback <no | yes>] [cldpredeal <yes | no>] [cldindex <0-63> ] [clipredeal <yes | no>] [cliindex <0-63>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value callsourceno <0-255> officeno <0-254> protocol <at0bidirection | cassignalbidirection | cassignaloutgoing | pra | sip | h323> Description Indicates the call source number. Indicates the office number. Indicates the adopted protocol. The parameter has the following value options:
at0bidirection: AT0 outgoing and incoming office cassignalbidirection: channel associated signaling outgoing and incoming office cassignaloutgoing: channel associated signaling outgoing office pra: PRA sip: SIP h323: H.323 None None no None no None

prefix <string> peerringback <no | yes> cldpredeal <yes | no> cldindex <0-63> clipredeal <yes | no> cliindex <0-63>
Indicates the prefix. Indicates whether to listen to the ring back tone from the peer end. Indicates whether to change the called number. Indicates the index number for changing the called number. Indicates whether to change the calling number. Indicates the index number for changing the calling number.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-61
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to add a relay bearer.
Examples
To add a relay bearer with callsourceno as 1, officeno as 2, protocol as PRA, and prefix as 123, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add tgld callsourceno 1 officeno 2 protocol pra prefix 123
Related Commands
config delete tgld show tgld config modify tgld
3.46 config add tts connectpara

Function
The command is used to add the connection parameters on the TTS server.
Syntax
config add tts connectpara servertype <srm mainsrmip <A.B.C.D> [backupsrmip <A.B.C.D> ] | ses ttsserverip <A.B.C.D> > [ttsnum <1-10> ]
Parameters
Parameter and Value servertype<srm|ses> Description srm: indicates that the BMRS is connected to the TTS server through the SRM module. ses: indicates that the BMRS is connected to the TTS server directly. mainsrmip<A.B.C.D> Indicates the IP address of the main SRM. (You need to set the value of this parameter only when the value of servertype is set to srm.) backupsrmip<A.B.C.D> Indicates the IP address of the spare SRM. (You need to set the value of this parameter only when the value of servertype is set to srm.) None None Default Value None
3-62
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameter and Value ttsserverip<A.B.C.D>
Description Indicates the IP address of the TTS server. (You need to set the value of this parameter only when the value of servertype is set to ses.)
Default Value None
ttsnum<1-10>
Number of available channels of the TTS resource. The value of this parameter must be equal to or smaller than the number of VP channels that is set for the resource board, and must be smaller than the triple of the number of licenses of the TTS server.Value range: 110
10
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
You need to restart the UAP to make the configurations effective.
Examples
Add the connection parameters of the TTS server in SES mode. The IP address of the TTS server is 192.168.102.2 and the number of available channels is 5.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add tts connectpara servertype ses ttsserverip 192.168.102.2 ttsnum 5
Set the connection parameters of the TTS server in SRM mode. The IP address of the active SRM is 192.168.102.14 and the IP address of the standby SRM is 192.168.102.13. The number of available channels is 5.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add tts connectpara servertype srm mainsrmip 192.168.102.14 backupsrmip 192.168.102.13 ttsnum 5.
Related Commands
config delete tts connectpara config modify tts connectpara show tts connectpara
3.47 config add tts textpara

Function
The command is used to add the text parsing parameters on the TTS server.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-63
Syntax
config add tts textpara no <0-31> langid <eng | chs | france | portugu | arab | deu | jap | kor | rus | ita | spa | chilean | danish |czech | polish | india >encodingscheme <gb_2312 | gbk | big5 | unicode | gb18030 | utf_8> unicodeendian<bigendian | littleendian> engineinfo<string>
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <0-31> langid <eng | chs | france | portugu | arab | deu | jap | kor | rus | ita | spa | chilean | danish |czech | polish | india > Description Serial number of the TTS text parsing parameter. Indicates the start equipment ID. The values are as follows:

eng: English chs: Chinese france: French portugu: Portuguese arab: Arabic deu: German jap: Japanese kor: Korea rus: Russian ita: Italian spa: Spanish chilean: Chilean danish: Danish czech: Czech polish: Polish india: Indian None
encodingscheme <gb_2312 | gbk | big5 | unicode | gb18030 | utf_8> unicodeendian <bigendian | littleendian> engineinfo
Indicates the encoding mode.
Indicates the byte order. Indicates the name of the engine.
None None
Mode
Config.
3-64
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Usage Guidelines
You need to restart the UAP to make the configuration effective.
Examples
Add the text parsing parameters on the TTS server, set the encoding mode to GBK, set the byte order to bigendian. Run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add tts textpara no 0 langid france encodingscheme gbk unicodeendian bigendian engineinfo acapla
Related Commands
config delete tts textpara show tts textpara config modify tts textpara
3.48 config add vp

Function
The command is used to add a voice peripheral (VP) and configure the properties of the VP.
Syntax
config add vp vpno <0-254> e1portno <0-3> slotno <1-4> slote1no <0-3> [asrnum <0-30>] [ttsnum <0-30>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value vpno <0-254> e1portno <0-3> slotno <1-4> Description Indicates the number of the VP. Indicates the number of the E1 port on the VP voice card. Indicates the number of the slot where the board connecting the UAP to the VP resides. Indicates the number of the E1 port that connects the UAP to the VP. Indicates the number of the ASR resources that are allocated to the UAP. Indicates the number of the TTS resources that are allocated to the UAP. Default Value None None None
slote1no <0-3> asrnum <0-30> ttsnum <0-30>
None 0 0
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-65
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Examples
Add a VP for connecting to the UAP, with the VP number of 10, E1 card port number of 0, E1 port in slot 2 of the UAP connected to the VP, 30 ASR resources allocated, and 30 TTS resources allocated:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add vp vpno 10 e1portno 0 slotno 2 slote1no 0 asrnum 30 ttsnum 30
Related Commands
config delete vp show vp display vp by display vpchannel
3.49 config autosave

Function
The command is used to set the auto-save switch.
Syntax
config autosave <disable | enable>
Parameters
Parameter and Value autosave <disable | enable> Description The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value disable
disable: indicates to disable the switch. enable: indicates to enable the switch.
Modes
Config.
3-66
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Usage Guidelines
If the auto-save switch is enabled, the system saves the data to the FLASH automatically and timely.
Examples
To set autosave to enable, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config autosave enable
Related Commands
show autosave switch
3.50 config cancelisolate card

Function
This function is to cancel the isolation of the card.
Syntax
config cancelisolate card slot <1-4>
Parameters
Parameter and Value slot <1-4> Description Indicates the number of the slot in the UAP2100. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Guide
None.
Examples
To cancel the isolation of the card in slot 1 on the UAP2100, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config cancelisolate card slot 1
Related Commands
config isolate card
3.51 config cancelisolate mpu

Function
This command is used to cancel the isolation of the AT0 card accompanying with the MPU main board.
Syntax
config cancelisolate mpu
Parameters
None.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Before you use this command, ensure that the AT0 card accompanying with the MPU main board is isolated.
Examples
To cancel the isolation of the AT0 card accompanying with the MPU main board, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config cancelisolate mpu
Related Commands
config isolate mpu
3.52 config ccm billforat0

Function
The command is used to set the switch for generating the AT0 bill.
Syntax
config ccm billforat0 flag <off | on>
3-68
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Description
Parameter and Value flag <off | on> Description Indicates the switch status. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None
off: close switch on: open switch
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
If the switch is opened, the system generates the bill of the AT0 trunk call.
Examples
To set flag of the AT0 bill to on, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config ccm billforat0 flag on
Related Commands
show ccm billforat0
3.53 config cdsp

Function
This command is used to configure the coding and decoding DSP (CDSP).
Syntax
config cdsp [gain <0-31>] [ecan <0-6>] [checkrtppackip <disable | enable>] [checkrtppackport <disable | enable>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value gain <0-31> ecan <0-6> checkrtppackip <disable | enable> Description Indicates the gain Indicates the threshold of to perform the ECAN by DSP Indicates the switch for checking the source IP address of RTP by DSP Default Value 0 6 disable
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-69
Parameter and Value checkrtppackport <disable | enable>
Description Indicates the switch of checking the source UDP port number of RTP by DSP
Default Value disable
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To set the value of gain of CDSP to 1, ecan to 4, checkrtppackip and checkrtppackport to disable, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config cdsp gain 1 ecan 4 checkrtppackip disable checkrtppackport disable
Related Commands
None.
3.54 config cdsp dtmf

Function
This command is used to configure the dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) of the CDSP.
Syntax
config cdsp dtmf [powerlevel <0-31>] [ontime <0-1000>] [offtime <0-1000>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value powerlevel <0-31> ontime <0-1000> offtime <0-1000> Description Indicates the power of generating DTMP by DSP Indicates the duration of generating the DTMF by DSP Indicates the default time of generating the DTMF by DSP Default Value 0 100 100
3-70
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To set the value of powerlevel to 15, ontime and offtime to 200, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config cdsp dtmf powerlevel 15 ontime 200 offtime 200
Related Commands
None.
3.55 config cdsp fax

Function
This command is used to configure the fax of the CDSP.
Syntax
config cdsp fax [mod <null | bypass | t38>] [ifpnum <0-6>] [tcfmode <remote | local>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value mod <null | bypass | t38> ifpnum <0-6> tcfmode <remote | local> Description Indicates fax mode of DSP Indicates the redundant IFP number of T38 generated by DSP Indicates the TCF transmitting mode Default Value None 3 remote
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to configure cdsp fax.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-71
Examples
To set the value of mod to T38, ifpnum to 3 and tcfmode to remote, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config cdsp fax mod t38 ifpnum 1 tcfmode remote
Related Commands
None.
3.56 config cdsp rfc2198

Function
The command is to configure whether to enable the RFC2198 of the CDSP.
Syntax
config cdsp rfc2198 switch <off | on>
Parameters
Parameter and Value switch <disable | enable> Description Indicates whether to enable the RFC2198 of the CDSP. Default Value disable
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
Run the following command to enable the RFC2198 of the CDSP:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config cdsp rfc2198 switch on
Related Commands
config cdsp rfc2833 show cdsp argu
3-72
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3.57 config cdsp rfc2833

Function
This command is used to configure whether to enable the RFC2833 of the CDSP.
Syntax
config cdsp rfc2833 switch <on | off>
Parameters
Parameter and Value switch <on | off> Description Indicates whether to enable the RFC2833 of the CDSP. Default Value off
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
Run the following command to enable the RFC2833 of the CDSP:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config cdsp rfc2833 switch on
Related Commands
config cdsp rfc2198 config cdsp payloadtype show cdsp payloadtype show cdsp argu
3.58 config createbill

Function
The command is used to set switch for generating the bill.
Syntax
config createbill switch <off | on>
Parameters
Parameter and Value switch <off | on> Description Indicates the switch. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value off
off: close the switch on: open the switch
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The switch change takes effect immediately, and not affects the system performance. After open the switch for generating the bill, you need to connect with the bill terminal; otherwise, you cannot make a call when calls fill in the bill pool.
Examples
To open the switch for generating the bill, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config createbill switch on
Related Commands
show createbill switch
3.59 config delete am

Function
The command is used to delete the information about the AM.
Syntax
config delete am no <0-3>
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <0-3> Description Indicates the number of the AM. Default Value None
3-74
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The UAP does not provide the function of modifying an AM record. Therefore, to modify an AM record, you need to delete the AM record and then add a new one.
Examples
Assume that AM 0 has been added to the UAP. Delete this AM by using the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete am no 0
Related Commands
config add am show aminfo
3.60 config delete anonymouscall

Function
The command is used to delete the information about the anonymous call.
Syntax
config delete anonymouscall
Parameters
None.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
Run the following command to delete the information about the anonymous call:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete anonymouscall
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-75
Related Commands
show anonymouscall config add anonymouscall
3.61 config delete batch sipue

Function
The command is used to delete SIP UEs in batch.
Syntax
config delete batch sipue seid <string> [step <1-1000>] [number <1-1024>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value seid <string> step <1-1000> number <1-1024> Description Indicates the start equipment ID. Indicates the interval between two consecutive equipment IDs. Indicates the number of pieces of equipment to be deleted. Default Value None 1 1
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
This command is applicable to the case that the values of step are the same.
Examples
Run the following command to delete SIP terminals in batch with seid as 1234, and number as 10.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete batch sipue seid 1234 number 10
Related Commands
config modify batch sipue config add batch sipue
3-76
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3.62 config delete batch sptfile

Function
The command is used to delete the mapping relations between the special tone board (SPT) file numbers specified on the centralized configuration console and the numbers of the voice playing files in voice.zip on the UAP2100.
Syntax
config delete batch sptfile sptno <0-252> [number <1-253>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value sptno <0-252> number <1-253> Description Indicates an SPT file number specified on the centralized configuration console. Indicates the number of SPT files whose mapping relations are deleted. Default Value None None
Modes
Config
Usage Guidelines
If the value of number is not specified in the command, the mapping relation of the SPT file specified by sptno is deleted. If the value of number is specified in the command, the mapping relations of the number (specified by number) of consecutive SPT files (starting from the file specified by sptno) are deleted.
Examples
Delete the mapping relation between the SPT file No.100 specified on the centralized configuration console and a voice playing file in voice.zip on the UAP2100.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete batch delete sptno 100
Related Commands
config modify sptfile show sptfile relation
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-77
3.63 config delete callpurview

Function
The command is used to delete the purview of a call.
Syntax
config delete callpurview k <0-9>
Parameters
Parameter and Value k <0-9> Description Indicates the call purview options. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to delete the existing purview of a call.
Examples
To delete the purview of a call with k as 4, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete callpurview k 4
Related Commands
config modify callpurview config add callpurview show callpurview
3.64 config delete callsource

Function
The command is used to delete a call source.
Syntax
config delete callsource no <0-255>
3-78
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <0-255> Description Indicates the number of the call resource. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to delete the existing call resource.
Examples
To delete a call resource with no as 1, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete callsource no 1
Related Commands
config add callsource show callsourceno
3.65 config delete card

Function
This command is used to delete a card.
Syntax
config delete card slot <1-4>
Parameters
Parameter and Value slot <1-4> Description Indicates the slot number. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-79
Usage Guidelines
Before you delete a card, ensure that the card is in the target slot and is isolated by using the config isolate card command.
Examples
To delete the card in slot 2, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete card slot 2
Related Commands
config isolate card config add card slot type atu officeno
3.66 config delete cassignal

Function
The command is used to delete channel associated signaling.
Format
config delete cassignal casname <string>
Parameters
Parameter and Value casname <string> Description Indicates the name of channel associated signaling. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To delete the channel associated signaling with casname as r2_2bit_mfc, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete cassignal casname r2_2bit_mfc
3-80
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Related Commands
config add cassignal config modify cassignal show cassignal
3.67 config delete cp

Function
The command is used to delete a record of the CP that is connected to the UAP.
Syntax
config delete cp cpno <0-254> e1portno <0-7>
Parameters
Parameter and Value cpno <0-254> e1portno <0-7> Description Indicates the number of the CP. Indicates the number of the E1 port on the CP voice card. Default Value None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The records of the specified CP number and E1 card port number already exist. By using the command show cp, you can view the existing CP records.
Examples
Delete a CP that is connected to the UAP, with the CP number of 10 and E1 card port number of 0:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete cp cpno 10 e1portno 0
Related Commands
config add cp config modify cp show cp display cp by
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-81
display cpchannel
3.68 config delete cti

Function
The command is used to delete CTI information. The database can store only two CTI records.
Syntax
config delete cti no <0-3>
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <0-3> Description Indicates deleting the number of a CTI record. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The UAP does not provide the function of modifying a CTI record. Therefore, to modify a CTI record, you need to delete the CTI record and then add a new one.
Examples
Assume that the information about CTI 0 has been added to the UAP. Delete the information by using the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete cti no 0
Related Commands
config add cti show ctinfo
3.69 config delete fp

Function
The command is used to delete a record of the FP that is connected to the UAP.
3-82
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Syntax
config delete fp fpno <0-254> e1portno <0-1>
Parameters
Parameter and Value fpno <0-254> e1portno <0-1> Description Indicates the number of the FP. Indicates the number of the E1 port on the FP voice card. Default Value None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The records of the specified FP number and E1 card port number already exist. By using the command show fp, you can view the existing FP records.
Examples
Delete an FP that is connected to the UAP, with the FP number of 10 and E1 card port number of 0:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete fp fpno 10 e1portno 0
Related Commands
config add fp config modify fp show fp display fp by display fpchannel
3.70 config delete hostprefix

Function
This command is used to delete an analysis prefix of the calling number.
Syntax
config delete hostprefix dn <string>
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-83
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> Description Indicates an analysis prefix of the calling number. Its value contains a maximum of 15 digits. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To delete the analysis prefix 10 of the calling number, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete hostprefix dn 10
Related Commands
config add hostprefix config modify hostprefix show hostprefix
3.71 config delete line report

Function
The command is used to delete line signaling reporting adaptation data.
Format
config delete line report id <0-254> [physicsevent <0-254>] [para <0-254>] [callstate <0-254>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value id <0-254> physicsevent <0-254> para <0-254> Description Indicates a reporting adaptation index. Indicates the type of a physical signal. Indicates a physical signal parameter. Default Value None None None
3-84
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameter and Value callstate <0-254>
Description Indicates a call state.
Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To delete the line signaling reporting adaptation data with id as 1 and with the requirement that the logical event to which line signal 010 received on the outgoing trunk in the ringing state corresponds is a response signal, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete line report id 1 physicsevent 0 para 4 callstate 3
Related Commands
config add line report show line report
3.72 config delete line send

Function
The command is used to delete line signaling sending adaptation data.
Format
config delete line send id <0-254> [logicevent <0-254>] [physicsevent <0-254>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value id <0-254> logicevent <0-254> physicsevent <0-254> Description Indicates a sending adaptation index. Indicates a logical signal. Indicates the physical signal type Default Value None None None
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-85
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To delete line signaling sending adaptation data with id as 1, logicevent as 3 and physicsevent as 3, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete line send id 1 logicevent 3 physicsevent 3
Related Commands
config add line send show line send
3.73 config delete localseat

Function
The command is used to delete the seat numbers of the UAP in batches. You need to specify the start and end seat numbers and the count of the consecutive seat numbers to be deleted.
Syntax
config delete localseat dn <string> [number <1-30>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> number <1-30> Description Indicates start and end seat numbers. Indicates the number of offset seats (allocated numbers). Default Value None 1
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The UAP in the current version cannot check the validity of seat numbers. Therefore, you need to ensure the reliability of the data during configuration. If you do not enter the number parameter, a seat is deleted by default.
3-86
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Examples
Delete 10 consecutive seat numbers of the UAP starting from 8000:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete localseat dn 8000 number 10
Related Commands
config add localseat show seatno
3.74 config delete logserver

Function
The command is used to delete a UAP log server.
Syntax
config delete logserver ip <A.B.C.D>
Parameters
Parameter and Value ip <A.B.C.D> Description Indicates the IP address of the UAP log server. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
Delete the log server with the IP address of 192.168.1.100:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete logserver ip 192.168.1.100
Related Commands
config add logserver show logserverinfo
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-87
3.75 config delete mg

Function
The command is used to delete the MG.
Syntax
config delete mg domainname <string>
Parameters
Parameter and Value domainname <string> Description Indicates the domain name of the MG. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
If the MG is configured with the subscribers, you cannot delete this MG.
Examples
To delete the MG with domainname as ag232, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete mg domainname ag232
Related Commands
config add mg config modify mg domainname config modify mg ip show mg
3.76 config delete mpu type at0

Function
This command is used to delete the AT0 card accompanying with the MPU main board.
Syntax
config delete mpu type at0
3-88
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameters
None.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
This command is used to delete the AT0 card accompanying with the MPU main board. Before you delete the AT0 card, use the config isolate mpu command to isolate the AT0 card.
Examples
To delete the AT0 card accompanying with the MPU main board, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete mpu type at0
Related Commands
show at0tkc mpu config isolate mpu config add mpu type at0
3.77 config delete mra

Function
This command is used to delete the connection configuration of an MRA.
Syntax
config delete mra no <0-1>
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <0-1> Description Indicates the sequence number of the MRA. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-89
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To delete an MRA with the sequence number of 0, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete mra no 0
Related Commands
config add mra show mrainfo
3.78 config delete nfs

Function
The command is used to delete an NFS.
Syntax
config delete nfs type <bmrs nfs <0-1> | bill>
Parameters
Parameter and Value type <bmrs | bill> Description Indicates the type of an NFS. The values are as follows:
Default Value None
bmrs: indicates an NFS that stores the voice playing files and voice recording files. bill: indicates an NFS that stores CDR files. None
nfsno <0-1>
Indicates the number of an NFS. Up to two NFSs can be configured.
Modes
Config
Usage Guidelines
Before deleting an NFS of the bill type, make sure that the traffic statistics function of the UAP2100 trunk is disabled.
3-90
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Examples
Delete the NFS No.0 of the bmrs type.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete nfs type bmrs nfsno 0
Delete an NFS of the bill type.

[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete nfs type bill
Related Commands
config add nfs config modify nfs show nfs config modify statswitch enable
3.79 config delete nirc prefix

Function
The command is used to delete the network call routing prefix.
Syntax
config delete nirc prefix no <1-128>
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <1-128> Description Indicates the number of the network call routing prefix. Default Value None
Modes
Config
Usage Guidelines
None
Examples
Delete network call routing prefix 1:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete nirc prefix no 1
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-91
Related Commands
config add nirc prefix show nirc prefix
3.80 config delete numdeal

Function
Delete the record of adding a prefix to all the called numbers starting with a certain prefix.
Syntax
config delete numdeal dn <string>
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> Description Indicates the called number prefix. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines

In this command, the dn parameter is optional. Every time the command is run, a record of number prefix addition is deleted. You can view existing records by running the command show numdeal.
Examples
Delete the record of adding a prefix to all the numbers starting with 80, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete numdeal dn 80
Related Commands
config add numdeal show numdeal
3-92
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3.81 config delete office

Function
The command is used to delete an office.
Syntax
config delete office no <0-254>
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <0-254> Description Indicates the office number. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to delete an existing office. If the office is configured with prefix, SIP protocol, or H323 protocol, you cannot delete this office.
Examples
To delete an office with no as 2, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete office no 2
Related Commands
config add office config modify office show office
3.82 config delete office selectcode

Function
The command is used to delete a specified office direction selection code.
Format
config delete office selectcode <0-254>
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-93
Parameters
Key Word and Value selectcode <0-254> Description Indicates an office direction selection code. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
When you delete a specified office direction selection code, if the index is used by an office direction, the office direction selection code will fail to be deleted.
Examples
To delete office direction selection code 1, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete office selectcode 1
Related Commands
config add office selectcode config modify office selectcode show office selectcode
3.83 config delete peercomponent

Function
The command is used to delete the device of the peer office.
Syntax
config delete peercomponent domainname <string>
Parameters
Parameter and Value domainname <string> Description Indicates the domain name of the peer office device. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to delete the peer office device with specified domain name.
Examples
To delete the peer office device with domainname as ss152, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete peercomponent domainname ss152
Related Commands
show peercomponent config add peercomponent
3.84 config delete pralink

Function
The command is used to delete a PRA link.
Syntax
config delete pralink linkno <0-255>
Parameters
Parameter and Value linkno <0-255> Description Indicates the link number. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to delete an existing PRA link.
Examples
To delete a PRA link with linkno as 200, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete pralink linkno 200
Related Commands
config add pralink show pralink
3.85 config delete predeal

Function
The command is used to delete the index for changing the number.
Syntax
config delete predeal index <0-1023>
Parameters
Parameter and Value index <0-1023> Description Indicates the index number of the change prefix. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
If the number change index to be deleted is used by a prefix, you need to delete the prefix first.
Examples
To delete a number change index with index as 2, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete predeal index 2
Related Commands
config add predeal show predeal
3.86 config delete prefix

Function
The command is used to delete a prefix.
Syntax
config delete prefix dn <string>
3-96
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> Description Indicates the prefix number. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to delete an existing specified prefix.
Examples
To delete a prefix with dn as 112, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete prefix dn 112
Related Commands
config add prefix dn config modify prefix config delete prefix show prefix
3.87 config delete pstndeal

Function
This command is used to delete a special direct-dialing number.
Syntax
config delete pstndeal dn <string>
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> Description Indicates a special direct-dialing number. Its value contains a maximum of 15 digits. Default Value None
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-97
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To delete the special direct-dialing number 123456, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete pstndeal dn 123456
Related Commands
config add pstndeal show pstndeal
3.88 config delete ringrelate

Function
The command is used to delete a ring type index related to the protocol.
Syntax
config delete ringrelate no <0-255>
Parameters
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to delete the ring type index related to the protocol.
Examples
To delete a ring type index with no as 3, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete ringrelate no 3
3-98
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Related Commands
config add ringtype config modify ringrelate show ringrelate
3.89 config delete ringservice

Function
The command is used to delete a ring number.
Syntax
config delete ringservice dn <string> [num1 <string>] [num2 <string>] [num3 <string>] [num4 <string>] [num5 <string>] [num6 <string>] [num7 <string>] [num8 <string>] [num9 <string>] [num10 <string>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> num1 <string> num2 <string> num3 <string> num4 <string> num5 <string> num6 <string> num7<string> num8 <string> num9 <string> num10 <string> Descriptionv Indicates the number of the subscriber. Indicates the ring number 1. Indicates the ring number 2. Indicates the ring number 3. Indicates the ring number 4. Indicates the ring number 5. Indicates the ring number 6. Indicates the ring number 7. Indicates the ring number 8. Indicates the ring number 9. Indicates the ring number 10. Default Value None None None None None None None None None None None
Modes
Config.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-99
Usage Guidelines
If the parameters from num1 to num10 are not set, the system deletes the ring service of this number by default. For the parallel ring type, at least one number needs to be kept when deleing; otherwise the operation fails.
Examples
To delete the number 330001 of the subscriber with num1 as 330010, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete ringservice dn 330001 num1 330010
Related Commands
config add ringservice config modify ringservice show ringservice
3.90 config delete ringtype

Function
The command is used to delete a ring type index.
Syntax
config delete ringtype no <0-255>
Parameters
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to delete a specified ring type index.
Examples
To delete a ring type index with no as 2, run the following command:
3-100
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)

[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete ringtype no 2
Related Commands
config add ringtype config modify ringtype show ringtype
3.91 config delete sipselect

Function
The command is used to delete SIP trunk polling.
Syntax
config delete sipselect prefix1 <string>
Parameters
Parameter and Value prefix1 <string> Description Indicates SIP trunk prefix 1 that is configured in SIP trunk polling. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
Assume that the UAP is configured with the polling rule that SIP trunk prefix 1 is 081. Delete this rule by using the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete sipselect prefix1 081
Related Commands
config add sipselect show sipselect
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-101
3.92 config delete sipue

Function
The command is used to delete a single SIP UE.
Syntax
config delete sipue eid <string>
Parameters
Parameter and Value eid <string> Description Indicates the equipment ID. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
Run the following command to delete the SIP UE with eid as 1234.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete sipue eid 1234
Related Commands
config add sipue config modify sipue show sipue
3.93 config delete staticgw

Function
The command is used to delete a static gateway.
Syntax
config delete staticgw <string>
3-102
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameters
Parameter and Value staticgw <string> Description Indicates the name of the static gateway. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
Run the following command to delete the static gateway with staticgw as gw.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete staticgw gw
Related Commands
config add staticgw config modify staticgw show staticgw
3.94 config delete subbox

Function
This command is used to delete a subscriber box.
Syntax
config delete subbox no <1-4>
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <1-4> Description Indicates the number of a subscriber box. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-103
Usage Guidelines
Before you delete a subscriber box, ensure that the target subscriber box exists.
Examples
To delete the subscriber box whose number is 1, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete subbox no 1
Related Commands
config add subbox show subbox
3.95 config delete subscriber dn

Function
The command is used to delete subscribers with specified numbers.
Syntax
config delete subscriber dn <string> [dnstep <1-1000>] [number <1-1024>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> dnstep <1-1000> number <1-1024> Description Indicates the number of the start subscriber. Indicates the space of the subscriber number. Indicates the number of subscribers. Default Value None 1 1
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to delete one or more subscribers with specified numbers.
Examples
To delete a subscriber with number 8000, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete subscriber dn 8000
To delete 10 subscribers with dn as 8000, run the following command:

[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete subscriber dn 8000 number 10
3-104
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Related Commands
config add subscriber config modify subscriber config show subscriber
3.96 config delete subscriber domainname

Function
The command is used to delete subscribers connected to a MG.
Syntax
config delete subscriber domainname <string>
Parameters
Parameter and Value domainname <string> Description Indicates the domain name of the MG the subscriber belonging to. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to delete all subscribers on the MG with a specified domain name.
Examples
To delete all subscribers on the MG with domainname as ag232, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete subscriber domainname ag232
Related Commands
config add subscriber config modify subscriber config show subscriber
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-105
3.97 config delete subscriber mpu

Function
This command is used to delete the eight POTS subscribers accompanying with the MPU main board.
Syntax
config delete subscriber mpu
Parameters
None.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To delete the eight POTS subscribers accompanying with the MPU main board, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete subscriber mpu
Related Commands
config add subscriber mpu dn show subscriber
3.98 config delete subscriber subboxno

Function
This command is used to delete a POTS subscriber in the subscriber box.
Syntax
config delete subscriber subboxno <1-4>
3-106
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameters
Parameter and Value subboxno <1-4> Description Indicates the number of the subscriber box. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To delete a POTS subscriber that is in No. 1 subscriber box, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete subscriber subboxno 1
Related Commands
config add subscriber subbox show subscriber
3.99 config delete tgld

Function
The command is used to delete the trunk bearer.
Syntax
config delete tgld callsourceno <0-255> officeno <0-254> protocol <at0bidirection | cassignalbidirection | cassignaloutgoing | pra | sip | h323> prefix <string>
Parameters
Parameter and Value callsourceno <0-255> officeno <0-254> Description Indicates the call source number. Indicates the office number. Default Value None None
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-107
Parameter and Value protocol <at0bidirection | cassignalbidirection | cassignaloutgoing | pra | sip | h323>
Description Indicates the adopted protocol. Value range:

Default Value None
at0bidirection: AT0 outgoing and incoming office cassignalbidirection: channel associated signaling outgoing and incoming office cassignaloutgoing: channel associated signaling outgoing office pra: PRA sip: SIP h323: H.323 None

prefix <string>
Indicates the prefix.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to delete the trunk bearer.
Examples
To delete the trunk bearer with the callsourceno as 1, officeno as 2, and protocol as PRA, and prefix as 123, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete tgld callsourceno 1 officeno 2 protocol pra prefix 123
Related Commands
show tgld config add tgld config modify tgld
3.100 config delete tts connectpara

Function
The command is used to delete the settings of the connection parameters on the TTS server.
3-108
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Syntax
config delete tts connectpara
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Examples
To delete the settings on the TTS server, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete tts connectpara
Related Commands
config add tts connectpara config modify tts connectpara show tts connectpara
3.101 config delete tts textpara

Function
The command is used to delete the settings of the text parsing parameters on the TTS server.
Syntax
config delete tts textpara no <0-31>
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <0-31> Description Serial number of the TTS text parsing parameter. Default Value none
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-109
Examples
To delete the settings of the text parsing parameters on the current TTS server, run the following command:
[%UAP3300(config)]# config delete tts textpara no 0
Related Commands
config add tts textpara config modify tts textpara show tts textpara
3.102 config delete vp

Function
The command is used to delete a record of the VP that is connected to the UAP.
Syntax
config delete vp vpno <0-254> e1portno <0-3>
Parameters
Parameter and Value vpno <0-254> e1portno <0-3> Description Indicates the number of the VP. Indicates the number of the E1 port on the VP voice card. Default Value None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The records of the specified VP number and E1 card port number already exist. By using the command show vp, you can view the existing VP records.
Examples
Delete a record of the VP that is connected to the UAP, with the VP number of 10 and E1 card port number of 0:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config delete vp vpno 10 e1portno 0
3-110
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Related Commands
config add vp show vp display vp by display vpchannel
3.103 config download

Function
The command is used to download files from TFTP server to UAP2100.
Syntax
config download file <all | argboot2 | data | fpga | license | voice | voip | dsp | subbox | mainnode | commandxml | alarmxml | boardxml | dbconfig | featurexml | arg| wimaxdccxml | clixml>
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-111
Parameters
Parameter and Value file <all | argboot2 | data | fpga | license | voice | voip | dsp | subbox | mainnode | commandxml | alarmxml | boardxml | dbconfig | featurexml | arg| wimaxdccxml | clixml> Description

Default Value
None.
all: all the program files argboot:level-2 boot program on the ARG data: the configuration data fpga: the FPGA file license: the license file voice: voice file voip: the file of the codec DSP chip dsp: the kernel file of the DSP board subbox: the software file of subbox mainnode: the software of the 51 chip commandxml: the command resource file of GUI network management system alarmxml: the alarm resource file of GUI network management system boardxml: the board resource file of GUI network management system dbconfig: the file of the table structure featuresxml: the configuration files of new features of OMU arg:Indicates the host software of the active board. wimaxdccxml: charging script file clixml:CLI file

Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Before running this command, you must pay much attention to the following:
Run show system information to check whether the Host IP address is consistent with the IP address of the PC installed with the TFTP server. If not, run config system hostip to change the Host IP address to the IP address of the PC installed with the TFTP server. To ensure that the TFTP server works properly, you must store the file that will be download in the specific path on the TFTP server.
Before running config download file license command, you must pay much attention to the following:
3-112
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)

The number of users that is allowed in the license file to be upgrade must be greater than or equal to the number of users that is specified in the earlier license file. Otherwise, the license file cannot be loaded. After the license file is loaded successfully, you must run the reboot command to restart the UAP2100 host. Thus, the uploaded license can take effect.
Examples
Download all files from TFTP server to UAP2100:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config download file all
Related Commands
config upload
3.104 config isolate card

Function
This command is used to isolate a card.
Syntax
config isolate card slot <1-4>
Parameters
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Before you isolate a card, ensure that the card is configured.
Examples
To isolate the card that is in slot 1, run the following command:[%UAP2100(config)]# config isolate card slot 1
Related Commands
config delete card
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-113
3.105 config isolate mpu

Function
This command is used to isolate the AT0 card accompanying with the MPU main board.
Syntax
config isolate mpu
Parameters
None.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
[%UAP2100(config)]# config isolate mpu
Related Commands
config add mpu type at0 officeno config delete mpu type at0
3.106 config localgw

Function
The command is used to set the local gateway.
Syntax
config localgw <string> rasport <1-5999> techprefix1 <string> [techprefix2 <string>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value localgw <string> rasport <1-5999> Description Indicates the name of the local gateway Indicates the port number of the gatekeeper RAS Default Value None None
3-114
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameter and Value techprefix1 <string> techprefix2 <string>
Description Indicates the prefix 1 of the gateway number Indicates the prefix 2 of the gateway number
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to set the local gateway.
Examples
For a local gatekeeper, to set its localgw to gw, rasport to 1200, and ttechprefix1 to gw2, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config localgw gw rasport 1200 techprefix1 gw2
Related Commands
show localgw
3.107 config mfpstop

Function
The command is used to configure the timeout value of CNo.1 detecting multi-frequency pulse (MFP) backward stop.
Syntax
config mfpstop overtime <1-5>
Parameters
Parameter and Value overtime <1-5> Description Indicates the timeout value. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-115
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
Run the following command to modify the timeout value of CNo.1 detecting MFP backward stop to 2s.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config mfpstop overtime 2
Related Commands
show mfpstop overtime
3.108 config modify at0tkc card slot portinboard

Function
This command is to modify the property of the circuit AT0.
Syntax
config modify at0tkc card slot <1-4> portinboard <list(0-7)> resistance <intf600 | complex> codectype <alaw | mulaw> gain <0-13>
Parameters
Parameter and Value slot <1-4> portinboard <list(0-7)> resistance <intf600 | complex> Description Indicates the number of the slot of the ATU board in the UAP2100. Indicates the number of AT0 outside plant. Indicates the resistance:

Default Value None None complex
intf600: 600 ohm complex: triple component alaw alaw: A law mulaw: law 6
codectype <alaw | mulaw>
Indicates the encoding and decoding type:

gain <0-13>
Indicates the gain.
Modes
Config.
3-116
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Usage Guidelines
Make sure that the slot number to be modified are configured with the ATU board.
Examples
To modify slot to 1, portinboard to 2, resistance to intf600, codectype to alaw, adgain to 4, gain to 6, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify at0tkc card slot 1 portinboard 2 resistance intf600 codectype alaw gain 4
Related Commands
show at0tkc slot
3.109 config modify at0tkc mpu portinboard

Function
This command is used to modify the circuit information of the AT0 card accompanying with the MPU main board.
Syntax
config modify at0tkc mpu portinboard <list(0-7)> [resistance <intf600 | complex>] [codectype <alaw | mulaw>] [gain <0-13>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value portinboard <list(0-7)> resistance <intf600 | complex> Description Indicates the number of AT0 outside plant. Indicates the resistance:

Default Value None complex
intf600: 600 ohm complex: triple component alaw
codectype <alaw | mulaw>
Indicates the encoding and decoding type:

alaw: A law mulaw: law 6
gain <0-13>
Indicates the gain.
Modes
Config.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-117
Usage Guidelines
This command is used to modify the circuit attribute of the AT0 card accompanying with the MPU main board.
Examples
Run the following command to modify the circuit attribute of the AT0 card accompanying with the MPU main board. Set portinboard to 2, resistance to intf600, codectype to alaw, and gain to 4.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify at0tkc mpu portinboard 2 resistance intf600 codectype alaw gain 4
Related Commands
config add mpu type at0 officeno show at0tkc mpu
3.110 config modify batch sipue

Function
The command is used to modify SIP UEs in batch.
Syntax
config modify batch sipue seid <string> authorizationtype <noauth | authbyip | authbyeid | authbyeidandip> [ip <a.b.c.d>] [password <string>] [codetype <g711a&g711u&g729&g723>] [rfc2833 <yes | no>] [pktmin <ten | fifteen | twenty | thirty>] [pktmax <ten | fifteen | twenty | thirty>] [gaincontrol <0-24>] [silencesup <off | on>] [echocancel <off | on>] [video <off | on>] [step <1-1000>] [number <1-1024>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value seid <string> authorizationtype <noauth | authbyip | authbyeid | authbyeidandi> Description Indicates the start equipment ID. Indicates the authentication type.

noauth: no authentication authbyip: authentication based on IP authbyeid: authentication based on ID. authbyeidandip: authentication based on IP address and ID. None None
ip <a.b.c.d> password <string>
Indicates the IP address. Indicates the password.
3-118
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameter and Value codetype <g711a&g711u&g729 &g723> rfc2833 <yes | no> pktmin <ten | fifteen | twenty | thirty>
Description Indicates the coding and decoding type.
Default Value None
Indicates whether RFC2833 is supported. Indicates the minimum packing duration (ms).

None None
10 15 20 30 None
pktmax <ten | fifteen | twenty | thirty>
Indicates the maximum packing duration (ms).

10 15 20 30 None None
gaincontrol <0-24> silencesup <off | on>
Indicates the gain control (dB). Indicates whether to perform the silence suppression.

off on None
echocancel <off | on>
Indicates whether to turn on the echo cancellation switch.

off on None 1 1
video <off | on> step <1-1000> number <1-1024>
Indicates whether the component supports video. Indicates the interval between two consecutive equipment IDs. Indicates the number of pieces of equipment to be modified.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
This command is applicable to the case that the values of step are the same, and the values of authorizationtype are the same.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-119

For the following two authentication types, you do not have to set the parameter password.

Examples
Run the following command to modify SIP UEs in batch. Set seid to 1234, authorizationtype to authbyeidandip, ip to 192.168.0.8, password to test, and number to 10.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify batch sipue seid 1234 authorizationtype authbyeidandip ip 192.168.0.8 passward test number 10
Related Commands
config add batch sipue config delete batch sipue
3.111 config modify callpurview

Function
The command is used to modify the call purview.
Syntax
config modify callpurview k <0-9> [purview <inter&local&localtoll&nationaltoll&internationaltoll&tonesupervision>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value k <0-9> Description Indicates the outgoing call purview options. Default Value None
3-120
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameter and Value purview <inter&local&localtoll& nationaltoll& internationaltoll& tonesupervision>
Description Indicates the type of the call purview. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None
inter: intra-office call local: local call localtoll: local toll call nationaltoll: national toll call internationaltoll: international toll call tonesupervision: listening purview
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to modify the existing call purview.
Examples
For a call with k as 4, to modify its purview to nationaltoll, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify callpurview k 4 purview nationaltoll
Related Commands
config add callpurview config delete callpurview show callpurview
3.112 config modify card slot type atu portincard

Function
This command is used to configure a eight-port AT0 card.
Syntax
config modify card slot <1-4> type atu portincard <list(0-7)> [officeno <0-254>]
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-121
Parameters
Parameter and Value slot <1-4> portincard <list(0-7)> officeno <0-254> Description Indicates the slot number of the AT0 card. Indicates the number of AT0 outside plant. Indicates the office number of the circuit on the AT0 card. Default Value None None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
This command is used to modify the office number of the AT0 card. Before you run this command, ensure that the office number is existed. If the office number does not exist, add an office number at first.
Examples
To add an office number 0, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config add office no 0 level upper
On the AT0 card that is in slot 2, to modify the office number of the third interface to 0, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify card slot 2 type atu portincard 3 officeno 0
Related Commands
config add card slot type atu officeno
3.113 config modify card slot type trunkport

Function
This command is used to modify the E1 port information of the E1 digital trunk card.
Syntax
config modify card slot <1-4> type dtu trunkport <0-3> [officeno <0-254>] [signallingtype <cassignal | pra>] [direction <bidirection | outgoing | incoming>] [crc4flag <no | yes>] [sendnumbertype <dtmf | mfc>]
3-122
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameters
Parameter and Value slot <1-4> trunkport <0-3> officeno <0-254> signallingtype <cassignal | pra> Description Indicates the slot number. Indicates the number of the E1 port. Indicates the office number of the E1 port. Indicate the signaling type of the E1:

cassignal (channel associated signaling) pra (PRA) bidirection
direction <bidirection | outgoing | incoming> crc4flag <no | yes>
Indicates the direction of the E1 relay circuit group, including: bidirection, outgoing, incoming. Indicates whether enable the CRC4 authentication:

no
no (disable) yes (enable) None
sendnumbertype <dtmf | mfc>
Indicates the type for sending number, including dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) and multiply frequency control.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
On the UAP-2DTU card in slot 4, run the following command to modify the signaling type of the E1 port whose number is 1. Set signallingtype to cassignal, officeno to 2, direction to bidirection, and sendnumbertype to DTMF.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify card slot 4 type dtu trunkport 1 officeno 2 signallingtype cassignal direction bidirection sendnumbertype dtmf
Related Commands
config delete card show device show card config add card slot type dtu
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-123
3.114 config modify card slot type tkcincard

Function
This command is used to modify the trunk circuit information of the E1 card.
Syntax
config modify card slot <1-4> type dtu tkcincard <list(0-191)> [officeno <0-254>] [direction <bidirection | outgoing | incoming>] [masterflag <master | nomaster>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value slot <1-4> tkcincard <list(0-191)> officeno <0-254> direction <bidirection | outgoing | incoming> masterflag <master | nomaster> Description Indicates the slot number of the E1 card. Indicates the circuit number in the board. Indicates the circuit office number of the E1 port. Indicates the direction of the E1 relay circuit group, including: bidirection, outgoing, incoming. Indicates the master flag:

Default Value None None None bidirection
None
master nomaster.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
This command is used to modify the direction of the trunk circuit on the E1 expansion card.
Examples
On the UAP-2DTU card in slot 3, to modify the direction of the trunk circuit group of 0 to 15 circuit to outgoing, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify card slot 3 type dtu tkcincard 0-15 direction outgoing
On the UAP-2DTU card in slot 3, to modify the direction of the trunk circuit group of 16 to 31 circuit to incoming, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify card slot 3 type dtu tkcincard 16-31 direction incoming
On the UAP-2DTU card in slot 3, to modify the direction of the trunk circuit group of 32 to 63 circuit to bidirection, run the following command:
3-124
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify card slot 3 type dtu tkcincard 32-63 direction bidirection
To view the direction of all the circuits on the UAP-2DTU card in slot 3, run the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show tkc slot 3
Related Commands
show tkc slot
3.115 config modify cassignal

Function
The command is used to modify the parameters about channel associated signaling.
Format
config modify cassignal casname <string> [castype <itu | china | brazil | chile>] [linetype <line | pulse>] [registertype <mfc | mfp>] [lrptindex <0-254>] [lsndindex <0-254>] [regrptindex <0-254>] [regsndindex <0-254>] [needbgroupsignal <yes | no>]
Parameters
Key Word and Value casname <string> castype <itu | china | brazil | chile> Description Indicates the name of channel associated signaling. Indicates the type of signaling standard. The options are as follows:

itu: standard ITU-T R2 signaling china: China No.1 signaling brazil: Brazil R2 signaling chile: Chile R2 signaling None
linetype <line | pulse>
Indicates the type of line signaling. The options are as follows:

line: digital line mode pulse: pulse mode None
registertype <mfc | mfp>
Indicates the type of register signaling. The options are as follows:

mfc: multi-frequency register mode mfp: pulse mode None
lrptindex <0-254>
Indicates a line signaling reporting adaptation index.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-125
Key Word and Value lsndindex <0-254> regrptindex <0-254> regsndindex <0-254> needbgroupsignal <yes | no>
Description Indicates a line signaling sending adaptation index. Indicates a register signaling reporting adaptation index. Indicates a register signaling sending adaptation index. Indicates whether group B signaling is used.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To modify the attributes of the channel associated signaling with casname as r2_2bit_mfc, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify cassignal casname r2_2bit_mfc lrptindex 1 lsnd 1 regrpindex 2 regsndindex 2
Related Commands
config add cassignal config delete cassignal show cassignal
3.116 config modify hostprefix

Function
This command is used to modify an analysis prefix of the calling number.
Syntax
config modify hostprefix dn <string> cldindex <0-63> minlen <0-15> maxlen <0-15>
3-126
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> Description Indicates an analysis prefix of the calling number. Its value contains a maximum of 15 digits. Indicates a called number change index. Indicates the minimum length of the number that the prefix matches. Indicates the maximum length of the number that the prefix matches. Default Value None
cldindex <0-63> minlen <0-15> maxlen <0-15>
None None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
Modify the analysis prefix 10 of the calling number by running the following command. The called number change index to which the modified prefix corresponds is 12, the minimum length of the number that the modified prefix matches is 5 digits, and the maximum length of the number is 5 digits.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify hostprefix dn 10 cldindex 12 minlen 5 maxlen 5
Related Commands
config add hostprefix config delete hostprefix show hostprefix config add predeal
3.117 config modify interface

Function
The command is used to configure the working status of a service network port on the UAP2100.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-127
Syntax
config modify interface <1-2> <auto negotiation | speed <speed10 | speed100> duplex <half | full>>
Parameters
Parameter and Value interface <0-1> auto negotiation speed <speed10 | speed100> Description Indicates the number of a UAP service network port. Sets the auto-negotiation mode for a service network port. Indicates the working rate of the service network port.
speed10: indicates that the working rate of the network port is 10 Mbit/s. speed100:indicates that the working rate of the network port is 100 Mbit/s. None
duplex <half | full>
Indicates the communication mode of the service network port.

half: indicates that the communication mode of the network port is half-duplex. full: indicates that the communication mode of the network port is full-duplex.
Modes
Config
Usage Guidelines
After running this command, you must run the save command to save the configurations. Otherwise, the configuration is invalid when you restart the UAP2100.
Examples
Set the 100 Mbit/s working rate and the full-duplex mode for the service network port No.1.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify interface 1 speed speed100 duplex full
Set the auto-negotiation mode for the service network port No.1.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify interface 1 auto negotiation
3-128
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Related Commands
show inteface
3.118 config modify localcrbt

Function
This command is used to determine whether to enable the local CRBT gateway function.
Syntax
config modify localcrbt enable <yes | no>
Parameters
Parameter and Value enable <yes | no> Description Indicates whether to enable the local CRBT gateway function. Default Value no
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To enable the local CRBT gateway function of the UAP2100, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify localcrbt enable yes
Related Commands
show localcrbt
3.119 config modify localvpchannel

Function
In the stacking situation, configure the number of local VP resources of the UAP.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-129
Syntax
config modify localvpchannel num <0-240>
Parameters
Parameter and Value num <0-240> Description Indicates the number of local VP resources of the UAP2100. Default Value Number of VP resources allowed by the license.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The number of local VP resources cannot exceed the maximum number of VP resources allowed by the license.
Examples
Set the number of local VP resources on the UAP to 30, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify localvpchannel num 30
Related Commands
show localvpchannel
3.120 config modify mg domainname

Function
The command is used to modify an MG based on the specified domain name.
Syntax
config modify mg domainname <string> [ip <A.B.C.D>] [mgport <1000-6000>] [mgcport <1000-6000>] [rfc2833 <no | yes>] [codetype <g711a&g711u&g729&g723>] [heartbeat <yes | no>] [heartbeatperiod <5-255>] [pktmin <ten | fifteen | twenty | thirty>] [pktmax <ten | fifteen | twenty | thirty>] [gaincontrol <0-24>] [silencesup <off | on>] [echocancel <off | on>] [video <off | on>]
Parameters
3-130
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameter and Value ip <A.B.C.D> mgport <1000-6000> mgcport <1000-6000> codetype <g711a&g711u&g729&g 723>
Description Indicates the IP address of the MG. Indicates the port number of the MG. Indicates the port number of the UAP2100. Indicates the coding and decoding type of the MG. The parameter has the following value options:

G.711a G.711 G.729 G.723 None None None None
rfc2833 <no | yes> heartbeat <yes | no> heartbeatperiod <5-255> pktmin <ten | fifteen | twenty | thirty>
Indicates whether rfc2833 is added. Indicates the heartbeat switch. Indicates the heartbeat period. Indicates the minimum packing duration (ms).

10 15 20 30 None

10 15 20 30 None None
gaincontrol <0-24> silencesup <off | on>
Indicates the gain control (dB). Indicates whether to perform the silence suppression.

off on None
echocancel <off | on>
Indicates whether to turn on the echo cancellation switch.

off on None
video <off | on>
Indicates whether the component supports video.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-131
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The IP address of the MG cannot be the same as that of other device. The attribute settings of the MG, such as ip and mgport, must be the same as that of the MG side.
Examples
For the MG with domainname as ag232, to modify its ip to 192.168.0.231, and codetype to g723, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify mg domainname ag232 ip 192.168.0.231 codetype g723
Related Commands
show mg config add mg
3.121 config modify mg ip

Function
The command is used to modify the MG based on a specified IP address.
Syntax
config modify mg ip <A.B.C.D> [domainname <string>] [mgport <1000-6000>] [mgcport <1000-6000>] [rfc2833 <no | yes>] [codetype <g711a&g711u&g729&g723>] [usedigitmap <no | yes>] [pktmin <ten | fifteen | twenty | thirty>] [pktmax <ten | fifteen | twenty | thirty>] [gaincontrol <0-24>] [silencesup <off | on>] [echocancel <off | on>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value ip <A.B.C.D> domainname <string> mgport <1000-6000> mgcport <1000-6000> Description Indicates the IP address of the MG. Indicates the domain name of the MG. Indicates the port number of the MG. Indicates the port number of the UAP2100. Default Value None None None None
3-132
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameter and Value codetype <g711a&g711u&g729& g723>
Description Indicates the coding and decoding type of the MG. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None
G.711a G.711 G.729 G.723 None None None
rfc2833 <no | yes> usedigitmap <no | yes> pktmin <ten | fifteen | twenty | thirty>
Indicates whether rfc2833 is added. Indicates whether to support the DigitMap. Indicates the allowed minimum packaged call duration, in millisecond. The parameter has the following value options:

10 15 20 30 None
Indicates the allowed maximum packaged call duration, in millisecond. The parameter has the following value options:

10 15 20 30 None None None
gaincontrol <0-24> silencesup <off | on> echocancel <off | on>
Indicates the gain control, in decibel. Indicates whether to suppress the silence. Indicates whether to cancel the echo.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The domain name of the MG cannot be the same as that of other device. The attribute settings of the MG, such as domainname and mgport, must be the same as that of the MG side.
Examples
For the MG with the ip as 192.168.0.232, to modify its domainname to ag231, codetype to g723, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify mg ip 192.168.0.232 domainname ag231 codetype g723
Related Commands
config add mg show mg
3.122 config modify mpu type at0 portincard

Function
This command is used to modify the circuit attribute of the AT0 card accompanying with the MPU main board.
Syntax
config modify mpu type at0 portincard <list(0-7)> [officeno <0-254>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value portincard <list(0-7)> officeno <0-254> Description Indicates the number of AT0 outside plant. Indicates the circuit office number of the AT0 card. Default Value None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
This command is used to modify the circuit office number of the AT0 card accompanying with the MPU main board. Before you run this command, ensure that an office number is added to the AT0 card.
Examples
To modify the office number of the third interface to 0, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify mpu type at0 portincard 3 officeno 0
Related Commands
config add mpu type at0 officeno
3-134
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3.123 config modify nfs

Function
The command is used to modify the configuration of an NFS.
Syntax
config modify nfs type <bmrs nfsno<0-1> | bill> [nfsip <A.B.C.D> ] [remotedir <string>] [localdir <string>] [uid <0-65535>] [gid <0-65535>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value type <bmrs | bill> nfsno <0-1> nfsip <A.B.C.D> remotedir <string> Description Indicates the type of an NFS. Indicates the number of an NFS. Indicates the IP address of an NFS. Indicates the remote shared directory of an NFS. The value is a string consisting of up to 64 characters. localdir <string> Indicates the local drive letter mapping the remote shared directory of an NFS. The value can be a letter ranging from b to z. uid <0-65535> Indicates the value of UserID in the connection properties of an NFS. The value is used in the NFS connection authentication. gid <0-65535> Indicates the value of GroupID in the connection properties of an NFS. The value is used in the NFS connection authentication. None None None Default Value None None None None
Modes
Config
Usage Guidelines
Before modifying the NFS connection configuration, make sure that an NFS is configured on the UAP2100. The latter five parameters in the command, namely, nfsip, remotedir, localdir, uid, and gid are optional; however, at least one parameter must be set in the command.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-135
Examples
Modify the configuration of an NFS of the bmrs type. For the NFS, the new configuration is as follows:

The IP address is 10.16.11.122. The remote shared directory is sharedw. The local drive letter mapping the remote shared directory is c. The value of uid is 65533. The value of gid is 65534.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify nfs type bmrs nfsip 10.16.11.122 remotedir sharedw localdir c uid 65533 gid 65534
Modify the configuration of an NFS of the bill type. For the NFS, the new configuration is as follows:

The IP address is 172.16.14.221. The remote shared directory is billw. The local drive letter mapping the remote shared directory is c. The value of uid is 65533. The value of gid is 65534.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify nfs type bill nfsip 172.16.14.221 remotedir billw localdir c uid 65533 gid 65534
Related Commands
config add nfs config delete nfs show nfs
3.124 config modify notefile

Function
The command is used to modify the configuration of note tone files on the built-in BMRS.
Syntax
config modify notefile [setdefault | [buffersize <2-10>] [notestartno <0-65534>] [notenum <1-65534>] [updatetime <1-20>] [defaultplayfmt<vox32 | vox24 | alaw | pcm>] [voicetype <alaw & pcm & vox32 & vox24> gainvalue<default | avol1 | avol2 | avol3 | avol4 | avol5 | dvol1 | dvol2 | dvol3 | dvol4 | dvol5>]]
3-136
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameters
Parameter and Value setdefault Description Indicates that the note tone files on the UAP2100 are restored to the default settings. That is, the cache size is 5 MB; the start number of note tone files is 0; the number of note tone files is 21000; the interval for automatically updating note tone files is five seconds. buffersize <2-10> Indicates the size of the cache for storing note tone files. Unit: MB notestartno <0-65534> notenum <1-65534> Indicates the start number of note tone files. Indicates the number of note tone files. The sum of the value of notestartno and the value of updatetime must be less than or equal to 65534. updatetime <1-20> Indicates the interval for updating note tone files automatically. Unit: second defaultplayfmt<vox32 | vox24 | alaw | pcm> voicetype <alaw & pcm & vox32 & vox24> gainvalue<default | avol1 | avol2 | avol3 | avol4 | avol5 | dvol1 | dvol2 | dvol3 | dvol4 | dvol5> Indicates the format of playing announcement supported by the BMRS by default. Indicates the codec type of the note tone volume. Indicates the gain value of note tone volume. None 5 0 21000 5 Default Value None
None 0
Modes
Config
Usage Guidelines
After the configuration of note tone files is modified, you need to restart the UAP2100 for the modifications to take effect.
Examples
Modify the configuration of the note tone files on the UAP2100. The new configuration is as follows:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-137
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)

The size of the cache for storing note tone files is 10 MB. The start number of note tone files is 10000. The number of note tone files is 20000. The interval for automatically updating note tone files is 20 seconds.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify notefile buffersize 10 notestartno 10000 notenum 20000 updatatime 20
Restore the note tone files on the UAP2100 to default settings.

[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify notefile setdefault
Related Commands
show noteinfo
3.125 config modify office no incomingright

Function
The command is used to modify incoming right of the office.
Syntax
config modify office no <0-254> [incomingright <inter | local | localtoll | ddd | idd>] [huaweidevice <yes | no>] [prioritytkgtype <at0bidirection | at0outgoing | cassignalbidirection | cassignaloutgoing | pra | sip | h323 | isupbidirection | isupoutgoing | tupbidirection | tupoutgoing | alltype>] [priorityvalue <0-254>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <0-254> incomingright <inter | local | localtoll | ddd | idd> Description Indicates the office number. Indicates the incoming right of the office.

inter: intra-office call local: local call localtoll: local toll call ddd: national toll call idd: international toll call no
huaweidevice <yes | no>
Indicates whether it is the Huawei device.
3-138
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameter and Value prioritytkgtype <at0bidirection | at0outgoing | cassignalbidirection | cassignaloutgoing | pra | sip | h323 | isupbidirection | isupoutgoing | tupbidirection | tupoutgoing | alltype>
Description Indicates the type of the trunk group with priority.

Default Value None
at0bidirection: bidirectional AT0 at0outgoing: only outgoing AT0 cassignalbidirection: CAS bi-direction cassignaloutgoing: CAS outgoing pra: PRA sip: SIP h323: H.323 isupbidirection: bidirectional ISUP isupoutgoing: only outgoing ISUP tupbidirection: bidirectional TUP tupoutgoing: only outgoing TUP alltype: all types None
priorityvalue <0-254>
Indicates the priority value.
Modes
Config
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to modify the incoming right of the office.
Examples
For the incoming right of the office with no as 2, to modify its prioritytkgtype to SIP and priorityvalue to 6, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify office no 2 incomingright local prioritytkgtype sip priorityvalue 6
Related Commands
None
3.126 config modify office no officeselectcode

Function
The command is used to modify the office direction selection code to an office direction.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-139
Syntax
config modify office no <0-254> officeselectcode <0-254> [charge <0-65534>] [timeindex <0-63>] [codetype <g711a & g711u & g729 & g723 & none>] [peerdevicename <string>] [carrierid <0-65534>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <0-254> officeselectcode<0-254 > charge <0-65534> Description Indicates the number of the office direction. Indicates an office direction selection code. Indicates the charge rate. If the office direction selection code is in the charge rate policy, the parameter is mandatory. timeindex <0-63> Indicates the time index. The time index identifies the time period during which the office direction can be used normally. If the office direction selection code is in the time policy, the parameter is mandatory. codetype <g711a&g711u&g729& g723> peerdevicename <string> carrierid <0-65534> Indicates the voice coding and decoding types. Indicates the peer device name. Indicates the carrier ID, 0 indicates local carrier None None Default Value None None None
None 0
Modes
Config
Usage Guidelines
None
Examples
To modify the office direction selection code corresponding to office direction 0 to 1, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify office no 0 officeselectcode 1
3-140
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Related Commands
config add office config delete office show office
3.127 config modify office selectcode

Function
The command is used to modify an office direction selection code.
Format
config modify office selectcode <0-254> [send2nddialtone <yes | no] repeatroute <yes | no> [routefaildealno <0-254>] [selecttype <none | chargebase | timebase | loadshare>]
Parameters
Key Word and Value selectcode <0-254> send2nddialtone repeatroute <yes | no> routefaildealno <0-254> selecttype <none | chargebase | timebase | loadshare | loadshare> Description Indicates an office direction selection code. Indicates whether to play the two-stage dialing tone. Indicates whether to support rerouting. Indicates the routing failure processing index. Indicates the policy for selecting an office direction. Default Value None No None None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The command is used to modify the attribute that is configured for an office direction selection code. You can modify the policy for selecting an office direction and routing failure processing index of the office direction.
Examples
To change the routing policy of office direction selection code 1 to the charge rate policy, run the following command:
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-141
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify office selectcode 1 selecttype chargebase
Related Commands
config add office selectcode config delete office selectcode show office selectcode
3.128 config modify peercomponent

Function
The command is used to modify the information about the peer office device.
Syntax
config modify peercomponent domainname <string> [ip <A.B.C.D>] [heartbeat <yes | no>] [heartbeatperiod <5-255>] config modify peercomponent ip <A.B.C.D> domainname <string>
Parameters
Parameter and Value domainname <string> ip <A.B.C.D> heartbeat <yes | no> heartbeatperiod <5-255> Description Indicates the domain name of the peer office device. Indicates the IP address of the peer office device. Indicates the heartbeat switch. Indicates the heartbeat period. Default Value None None None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
For the peer office device with domainname as ss152, to modify its IP address to 192.168.0.154, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify peercomponent domainname ss152 ip 192.168.0.154
3-142
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
For the peer office device with ip as 192.168.0.152, to modify its domain name to ss154, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify peercomponent ip 192.168.0.152 domainname ss154
Related Commands
config add peercomponent config delete peercomponent show peercomponent
3.129 config modify pralink

Function
This command is to modify the PRA link information.
Syntax
config modify pralink linkno <0-255> slot <1-4> trunkport <0-3> [position <user | network>] [ts <0-31>] [sendrestart <yes | no>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value linkno <0-255> slot <1-4> trunkport <0-3> position <user | network> ts <0-31> sendrestart <yes | no> Description Indicates the number of the PRA link. Indicates the slot number of the E1 board in the UAP2100. Indicates the port number of the E1 board in the UAP2100. Indicates the position, namely, user side or network side. Indicates the number of the time slot. Indicates whether to send a restart message. Default Value None None None user 16 no
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-143
Examples
For the PRA link with pra linkno as 100, slot number as 2, and E1 trunkport as 2, modify its position to networt, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify pralink linkno 100 slot 2 trunkport 2 position network
Related Commands
config add pralink config delete pralink show pralink
3.130 config modify prefix

Function
The command is used to modify the prefix information.
Format
config modify prefix dn <string> [callcategory <basic | new | in | sin | vu | ivr | card | intess >] [callattribute <umsleavemsgindon | umsleavemsgindoff | umsuserfaxnum | umsgetleavemsg | umsfaxuninum | inter | local | ddd | idd | emergency | modifypwd | apickupingroup | apickupspecial | calltelephonist | aabbrdial | consolepick | recordtone | cabbrdialall | playtone | cnsall | sdds | cdds | scfu | rccfu | ccfu | scfb | rccfb | ccfb | scfnr | rccfnr | ccfnr | sabbrdial | cabbrdial | swakeupcall | cwakeupcall | sabsentuser | cabsentuser | shotlined | chotlined | shotlinei | chotlinei | sautoredail | cautoredail | scallwait | ccallwait | scallback | ccallback | scallsave | ccallsave | scalllimit | ccalllimit | ssecretarysrv | csecretarysrv | ssecretarystation | csecretarystation | ssecretarysrvverify | csecretarystationverify | snightservice | cnightservice | telephonistreg | telephonistquit | telephonistdown | telephonistup | sremotecfb | cremotecfb | sremotecfnr | cremotecfnr | sremotecfu | cremotecfu | querydn | confattend | confisolate | conflistenonly | conflistentalk | conftalkonly | confkick | conftrigger | confterminate | vuconsole | vuconference | vuselfdefine | vutransfertelephonist | sfax | cfax | sotmnclip | cotmnclip | operatordisconnect | tonesupervision | operatorinsert | ssuperrightsuser | csuperrightsuser | svoicemailcfu | svoicemailcfb | svoicemailcfnr | sfaxmailcfu | cvoicemailcfu | cvoicemailcfb | cvoicemailcfnr | cfaxmailcfu | scfo | rccfo | ccfo | cardaccess | snp | cnp>] [cusattribute <null | cus1 | cus2 | cus3 | cus4 | cus5 | cus6 | cus7 | cus8 | cus9 | cus10 | cus11 | cus12 | cus13 | cus14 | cus15 |cus16 | cus17 |cus18 | cus19 | cus20 | cus21 | cus22 | cus23 | cus24 | cus25 | cus26 | cus27 | cus28 | cus29 | cus30 | cus31 | cus32>] [prefixcharge <yes | no>] [chargeindex <0-1023>] [cldpredeal <yes | no>] [cldindex <0-1023>] [minlen <0-24>] [maxlen <0-24>] [officeselectcode <0-254>] [vug <4-59>] [telephonegroupno number] [clipredeal <yes | no>] [cliindex <0-1023>] [isautodial <yes | no>] [pbxgroup <0-49>] [uselongcli <yes | no>]
3-144
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameters
Key Word and Value dn <string> callcategory <basic | new | in | sin | vu | ivr| card | intess> Description Indicates the prefix number. Indicates the call category. The options are as follows:

basic: basic service call new: new service call in: intelligent service call sin: call through the special access code vu: call through the virtual attendant ivr: call through an integrated virtual attendant card: card service call intess: call center access code None None None None None None None None None None None None no None
cusattribute <null | cus1 cus32> prefixcharge <yes | no> chargeindex <0-1023> cldpredeal <yes | no> cldindex <0-1023> officeselectcode <0-254> minlen <0-24> maxlen <0-24> vug <4-59> telephonegroupno number clipredeal <yes | no> cliindex <0-1023> isautodial <yes | no> pbxgroup <0-49>
Indicates the customized attribute of the subscriber at level 32. Indicates whether to charge fees according to the callee prefix. Indicates the charging index. Indicates whether to change the called number. Indicates the index number for changing the called number. Indicates an office direction selection code. Indicates the minimum length of the number when using it to locate the called party. Indicates the maximum length of the number when using it to locate the called party. Indicates the vug number. Indicates the number of the telephone group. The number is from 0 to 63. Indicates whether to change the calling number. Indicates the index number for changing the calling number. Indicates whether to auto-dial. Indicates the PBX group number.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-145
Key Word and Value uselongcli<yes | no> callattribute <umsleavemsgindon | umsleavemsgindoff | umsuserfaxnum | umsgetleavemsg | umsfaxuninum | inter | local | ddd | idd | emergency | modifypwd | apickupingroup | apickupspecial | calltelephonist | aabbrdial | consolepick | recordtone | cabbrdialall | playtone | cnsall | sdds | cdds | scfu | rccfu | ccfu | scfb | rccfb | ccfb | scfnr | rccfnr | ccfnr | sabbrdial | cabbrdial | swakeupcall | cwakeupcall | sabsentuser | cabsentuser | shotlined | chotlined | shotlinei | chotlinei | sautoredail | cautoredail | scallwait | ccallwait | scallback | ccallback | scallsave | ccallsave | scalllimit | ccalllimit | ssecretarysrv | csecretarysrv | ssecretarystation | csecretarystation | ssecretarysrvverify | csecretarystationverify | snightservice | cnightservice | telephonistreg | telephonistquit | telephonistdown | telephonistup | sremotecfb | cremotecfb | sremotecfnr | cremotecfnr | sremotecfu | cremotecfu | querydn | confattend | confisolate | conflistenonly | conflistentalk | conftalkonly | confkick | conftrigger | confterminate | vuconsole | vuconference | vuselfdefine | vutransfertelephonist | sfax | cfax | sotmnclip | cotmnclip | operatordisconnect |
3-146
Description Indicates whether to use a long number as the calling number. Indicates the service attribute. The options are as follows:
umsleavemsgindon: the prefix for turning on the message indicator umsleavemsgindoff: the prefix for turning off the message indicator umsuserfaxnum: the prefix of the user fax number (One fax has one number.) umsgetleavemsg: the unified access number for obtaining messages umsfaxuninum: the unified access number for sending faxes inter: inter-office call local: local call ddd: national toll call idd: international toll call emergency: emergency call modifypwd: change password apickupingroup: co-group pickup service apickupspecial: specified pickup service calltelephonist: call attendant position aabbrdial: abbreviated dialing consolepick: call waiting for attendant position recordtone: record cabbrdialall: cancel all abbreviated dialing playtone: play voice cnsall: cancel all registered supplementary service sdds: set no disturbance service cdds: cancel no disturbance service scfu: set unconditional call forwarding rccfu: remotely cancel unconditional call forwarding ccfu: cancel unconditional call forwarding scfb: set call forwarding busy rccfb: remotely cancel call forwarding busy ccfb: cancel call forwarding busy scfnr: set call forwarding no reply rccfnr: remotely cancel call forwarding no

Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Key Word and Value tonesupervision | operatorinsert | ssuperrightsuser | csuperrightsuser | svoicemailcfu | svoicemailcfb | svoicemailcfnr | sfaxmailcfu | cvoicemailcfu | cvoicemailcfb | cvoicemailcfnr | cfaxmailcfu | scfo | rccfo | ccfo | cardaccess | snp | cnp>
Description reply

Default Value
ccfnr: cancel call forwarding no reply sabbrdial: set abbreviated dialing cabbrdial: cancel abbreviated dialing swakeupcall: set alarm-call service cwakeupcall: cancel alarm-call service sabsentuser: set absent subscriber cabsentuser: cancel absent subscriber shotlined: set delay hotline service chotlined: cancel delay hotline service shotlinei: set instant hotline service chotlinei: cancel instant hotline service sautoredail: set auto-redial cautoredail: cancel auto-redial scallwait: set call waiting ccallwait: cancel call waiting scallback: set call back on busy ccallback: cancel call back on busy scallsave: set auto-redial on busy ccallsave: cancel auto-redial on busy scalllimit: set outgoing call bearing ccalllimit: cancel outgoing call bearing ssecretarysrv: set secretary service csecretarysrv: cancel secretary service ssecretarystation: set secretary station service csecretarystation: cancel secretary station service ssecretarysrvverify: verify secretary service csecretarystationverify: verify secretary station service snightservice: register night service cnightservice: cancel night service telephonistreg: register of operator telephonistquit: cancel of operator telephonistdown: operator logout telephonistup: operator login sremotecfb: remotely set call forwarding busy cremotecfb: remotely cancel call forwarding busy sremotecfnr: remotely set call forwarding no

Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-147
Key Word and Value
Description reply
Default Value
cremotecfnr: remotely cancel call forwarding no reply sremotecfu: remotely set unconditional call forwarding cremotecfu: remotely cancel unconditional call forwarding querydn: query-number service confattend: attend conference confisolate: isolate the subscriber from the conference conflistenonly: allow the subscriber to listen only conflistentalk: allow the subscriber to listen and talk conftalkonly: allow the subscriber to talk only confkick: kick the subscriber to out of the conference conftrigger: let the system to trigger to convene the conference confterminate: terminate the conference vuconsole: forward to the auto-attendant position through vu vuconference: forward to the conference through vu vuselfdefine: self-define the script through vu vutransfertelephonist: vu console sfax: register as the fax cfax: cancel the fax registration. sotmnclip: display the number of the calling party with multiple numbers cotmnclip: not display the number of the calling party with multiple numbers operatordisconnect: forced released by operator tonesupervision: operator monitoring operatorinsert: attendant break-in ssuperrightsuser: set subscriber with super right csuperrightsuser: cancel subscriber with super right svoicemailcfu: to set the service of call forwarding to voice mail unconditionally in

3-148
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Key Word and Value
Description dialup mode

Default Value
svoicemailcfb: to set the service of call forwarding to voice mail on busy in dialup mode svoicemailcfnr: to set the service of call forwarding to voice mail on no reply in dialup mode sfaxmailcfu: to set the service of call forwarding to fax mail unconditionally in dialup mode cvoicemailcfu: to cancel the service of call forwarding to voice mail unconditionally in dialup mode cvoicemailcfb: to cancel the service of call forwarding to voice mail on busy in dialup mode cvoicemailcfnr: to cancel the service of call forwarding to voice mail on no reply in dialup mode cfaxmailcfu: to cancel the service of call forwarding to fax mail unconditionally in dialup mode scfo: to set the service of call forwarding offline in dialup mode rccfo: to remotely cancel the service of call forwarding offline in dialup mode ccfo: to cancel the service of call forwarding offline in dialup mode in dialup mode cardaccess: to access the service through a card snp: to set the number portability cnp: to cancel the number portability

Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to modify the prefix information.
Examples
For the prefix 112, to modify its callattribute to ddd, cldindex to 4, and officeno to 1, run the following command:
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-149
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify prefix dn 112 callcategory basic callattribute ddd cldpredeal yes cldindex 4 officeno 1
Related Commands
config delete prefix show prefix config add prefix dn callcategory
3.131 config modify reanalysis prefix

Function
The command is used to modify the prefix information about the number reanalysis.
Syntax
config modify reanalysis prefix dn <string> callattribute <local | ddd | idd | vuconference> [cldpredeal <yes | no>] [cldindex <0-63>] [clipredeal <yes | no>] [cliindex <0-63>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> callattribute <local | ddd | idd | vuconference> Description Indicates the prefix number of the subscriber. Indicates the call attribute. The parameter has the following value options:

local: local call ddd: national toll call idd: international toll call vuconference: connecting virtual subscribers to a conference None None None None
cldpredeal <yes | no> cldindex <0-63> clipredeal <yes | no> cliindex <0-63>
Indicates whether to change the called number. Indicates the index for changing the called number. Indicates whether to change the calling number. Indicates the index for changing the calling number.
3-150
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to modify the prefix information about the number reanalysis.
Examples
For the prefix 012 of the number reanalysis, to modify its callattribute to local, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify reanalysis prefix dn 012 callattribute local
Related Commands
config add reanalysis prefix dn show prefix
3.132 config modify ringrelate

Function
The command is used to modify the index information about the ring type related to the protocol.
Syntax
config modify ringrelate no <0-255> protocol <mgcp | h248 | sip | bicc | h323 | m2ua | axcp | ancp | potscp> [normal <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>] [centrex <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>] [silent <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>] [first <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>] [fsk <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>] [stop <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>] [user1 <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 |
mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>] [user2 <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>] [user3 <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <0-255> protocol <protocol <mgcp | h248 | sip | bicc | h323 | m2ua | axcp | ancp | potscp> Description Indicates the index number of the ring type. Indicates the protocol type. The parameter has the following value options:

MGCP H.248 SIP BICC H.323 M2UA AXCP ANCP POTSCP
3-152
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameter and Value normal <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>
Description Indicates the normal ring. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None
centrex <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>
Indicates the Centrex ring. The parameter has the following value options:

Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-153
Parameter and Value slient <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>
Description Indicates the silent ring. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None
first <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>
Indicates the first ring. The parameter has the following value options:

3-154
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameter and Value fsk <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>
Description Indicates the FSK ring. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None
stop <mgcpv5ring0 | mgcpv5h248ring1 | mgcpv5h248ring2 | mgcpv5h248ring3 | mgcpv5h248ring4 | mgcpv5h248ring5 | mgcpv5h248ring6 | mgcph248ring7 | h248ring8 | h248ring9 | h248ring10 | h248ring11 | h248ring12 | h248ring13 | v5h248ring14 | h248ring15 | v5firstring>
Indicates the special ring. The parameter has the following value options:

Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-155

Default Value None

3-156
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)

Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command is used to modify the index information about the ring type related to the protocol.
Examples
For the ring type index with no as 3 and protocol as mgcp, to modify its normal to mgcpv5h248ring1, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify ringrelate no 3 protocol mgcp normal mgcpv5h248ring1
Related Commands
config add ringrelate show ringrelate config delete ringrelate
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-157
3.133 config modify ringservice

Function
The command is used to modify the ring number.
Syntax
config modify ringservice dn <string> [oldnum <string>] [newnum <string>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> oldnum <string> newnum <string> Description Indicates the number of the subscriber Indicates the old ring number. Indicates the new ring number. Default Value None None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to modify the ring number.
Examples
For the subscriber with dn as 330001, to modify the oldnum 330010 to newnum 330016, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config mod config modify sip parameter01 oldnum 330010 newnum 330016
Related Commands
config add ringservice config delete ringservice show ringservice
3.134 config modify ringtype

Function
The command is used to modify the index information about a ring type.
3-158
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Syntax
config modify ringtype no <0-255> [callernumsendtype <outband | inband>] [inter<normalring | centrexring | silentring | firstring | fskring | stopring | userring1 | userring2 | userring3>] [local<normalring | centrexring | silentring | firstring | fskring | stopring | userring1 | userring2 | userring3>] [localtoll<normalring | centrexring | silentring | firstring | fskring | stopring | userring1 | userring2 | userring3>] [nationaltoll<normalring | centrexring | silentring | firstring | fskring | stopring | userring1 | userring2 | userring3>] [internationaltoll<normalring | centrexring | silentring | firstring | fskring | stopring | userring1 | userring2 | userring3>] [centrex<normalring | centrexring | silentring | firstring | fskring | stopring | userring1 | userring2 | userring3>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <0-255> callernumsendtype <outband | inband> Description Indicates the index number of the ring type. Indicates the sending type of the calling number. The parameter has the following value options:

outband inband None
inter<normalring | centrexring | silentring | firstring | fskring | stopring | userring1 | userring2 | userring3>
Indicates the ring type of the intra-office call. The parameter has the following value options:

Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-159
Parameter and Value local<normalring | centrexring | silentring | firstring | fskring | stopring | userring1 | userring2 | userring3>
Description Indicates the ring type of the local call. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None
normalring centrexring silentring firstring fskring stopring userring1 userring2 userring3 None
localtoll<normalring | centrexring | silentring | firstring | fskring | stopring | userring1 | userring2 | userring3>
Indicates the ring type of the local toll call. The parameter has the following value options:

nationaltoll<normalring | centrexring | silentring | firstring | fskring | stopring | userring1 | userring2 | userring3>
Indicates the ring type of the national toll call. The parameter has the following value options:

3-160
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameter and Value internationaltoll<normalri ng | centrexring | silentring | firstring | fskring | stopring | userring1 | userring2 | userring3>
Description Indicates the ring type of the international toll call. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None
centrex<normalring | centrexring | silentring | firstring | fskring | stopring | userring1 | userring2 | userring3>
Indicates the ring type of the Centrex in-group call. The parameter has the following value options:

Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to modify the index information on a ring type.
Examples
For a ring type index with no as 2, to modify its callernumsendtype to inband, inter to centrexring, local to centrexring, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify ringtype no 2 callernumsendtype inband inter centrexring local centrexring
Related Commands
config delete ringtype
show ringtype config add ringtype
3.135 config modify sip parameter

Function
The command is used to set SIP protocol parameters.
Syntax
config modify sip parameter[t4 <10-100>] [srvport <0-6000>] [minregexpires <1-100>] [maxregexpires <1-100>] [minsessioninterval <90-1800>] [sessioninterval <90-7200>] [usesessiontimer <yes | no>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value t4 <10-100> srvport <0-6000> minregexpires <1-100> maxregexpires <1-100> minsessioninterval <90-1800> sessioninterval <90-7200> usesessiontimer <yes|no> Description Indicates the duration of the T4 timer. The unit is 100ms. Indicates the port number of the server. Indicates the minimum registration duration. The unit is minute. Indicates the maximum registration duration. The unit is minute. Indicates the minimum interval between two consecutive sessions. The unit is second. Indicates the interval between two consecutive sessions. The unit is second. Indicates whether to use a session timer. Default Value 50 5060 5 60 90 300 no
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
Run the following command to set the duration of the T4 timer to 10.
3-162
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)

[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify sip parameter t4 10
Related Commands
show sip parameter
3.136 config modify sipue

Function
The command is used to modify a single SIP UE.
Syntax
config modify sipue eid <string> authorizationtype <noauth | authbyip | authbyeid | authbyeidandip> [ip <a.b.c.d>] [password <string>] [pktmin <ten | fifteen | twenty | thirty>] [pktmax <ten | fifteen | twenty | thirty>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value eid <string> authorizationtype <noauth | authbyip | authbyeid | authbyeidandip> Description Indicates the ID of the equipment. Indicates the authentication type.

noauth: no authentication authbyip: authentication based on IP authbyeid: authentication based on ID. authbyeidandip: authentication based on IP address and ID. None None None
ip <a.b.c.d> password <string> pktmin <ten | fifteen | twenty | thirty>
Indicates the IP address. Indicates the password. Indicates the minimum packing duration (ms).

10 15 20 30 None

10 15 20 30
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-163
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines


Examples
Run the command to modify a single SIP UE with eid as 1234. Set authorizationtype to authbyip, and ip to 172.16.18.18.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify sipue eid 1234 authorizationtype authbyip ip 172.16.18.18
Related Commands
config add sipue config delete sipue show sipue
3.137 config modify sptfile

Function
The command is used to modify the mapping relations between the SPT file numbers specified on the centralized configuration console and the numbers of the voice playing files in voice.zip on the UAP2100.
Syntax
config modify sptfile sptno <0-252> localfileno <0-249>
Parameters
Parameter and Value sptno <0-252> Description Indicates an SPT file number specified on the centralized configuration console. Default Value None
3-164
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameter and Value localfileno <0-249>
Description Indicates the number of a voice playing file in voice.zip.
Default Value None
Modes
Config
Usage Guidelines
An SPT file number specified on the centralized configuration console ranges from 0 to 252.For example, if the SPT file No.100 is specified on the centralized configuration console, you can specify a voice playing file whose number ranges from 0 to 249 in voice.zip by configuring the mapping relation.
Examples
Configure the voice playing file No.200 to be played by the UAP2100 when the SPT file No.100 is specified on the centralized configuration console.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify sptfile sptno 100 localfileno 200
Related Commands
config delete batch sptfile show sptfile relation
3.138 config modify staticgw

Function
The command is used to modify the information on a static gateway.
Syntax
config modify staticgw <string> [ip <a.b.c.d>] [signalport <1-65535>] [techprefix1 <string>] [techprefix2 <string>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value staticgw <string> ip <a.b.c.d> signalport <1-65535> Description Indicates the name of the static gateway. Indicates the IP address. Indicates the signaling port number. Default Value None None None
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-165
Parameter and Value techprefix1 <string> techprefix2 <string>
Description Indicates the number prefix 1 of the gateway. Indicates the number prefix 2 of the gateway.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
Run the command to modify the information on the static gateway with staticgw as gw. Set ip to 192.169.2.1, signalport to 1400, and techprefix1 to 123456.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify staticgw gw ip 192.169.2.1 signalport 1400 techprefix1 123456
Related Commands
config add staticgw config delete staticgw show staticgw
3.139 config modify statpara

Function
The command is used to modify the configuration of temporary CDR files on the NFS.
Syntax
config modify statpara [statlen <1-5> ] [stattime <30-600>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value statlen<1-5> Description Indicates the size of the cache for storing temporary CDR files on the NFS. Unit: MB Default Value 2
3-166
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameter and Value stattime<30-600>
Description Indicates the duration for storing a temporary CDR file on the NFS. Unit: second
Default Value 180
Modes
Config
Usage Guidelines
The two parameters in the command, namely, statlen and stattime are optional; however, at least one parameter must be set in the command.
Examples
Modify the configuration of temporary CDR files. The new configuration is as follows:

The size of the cache for storing temporary CDR files is 3 MB. The duration for storing a temporary CDR file in the cache is 240 seconds.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify statpara statlen 3 stattime 240
Related Commands
show statspara
3.140 config modify statswitch

Function
The command is used to enable or disable the traffic statistics function of the UAP2100 trunk.
Syntax
config modify statswitch enable <yes | no>
Parameters
Parameter and Value enable <yes | no> Description Indicates whether to enable the traffic statistics function of the UAP2100 trunk. The values are as follows:

Default Value no
yes no
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-167
Modes
Config
Usage Guidelines
Before enabling the traffic statistics function of the UAP2100 trunk, make sure that an NFS is added.
Examples
Enable the traffic statistics function of the UAP2100 trunk.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify statswitch enable yes
Related Commands
config add nfs show statswitch
3.141 config modify subbox no aulaw

Function
This command is used to modify the coding or decoding type of the subscriber box, including: A law and law.
Syntax
config modify subbox no <1-4> aulaw <alaw | ulaw>
Parameters
Parameter and Value aulaw <alaw | ulaw> Description

Default Value None
alaw: A law ulaw: law
no <1-4>
Indicates the number of the subscriber box.
None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
This command is used to specify the coding and decoding of the subscriber box.
3-168
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Examples
To modify coding and decoding type of the subscriber box whose number is 2 to A law, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify subbox no 2 aulaw alaw
Related Commands
config modify subbox no slicemode
3.142 config modify subscriber directdial disable

Function
The command is used to disable the AT0 direct dial function of subscribers.
Syntax
config modify subscriber directdial disable dn <string> [number <1-1024>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> number <1-1024> Description Indicates the start subscriber number. Indicates the number of subscribers to be modified in batch. Default Value None 1
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
To disable the AT0 direct dial function of subscribers, the following conditions must be satisfied:

The subscriber numbers exist. The subscribers are AT0 direct dial subscribers.
Examples
Run the command to disable the AT0 direct dial function of two subscribers with dn as 1000 and 1001.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify subscriber directdial disable dn 1000 number 2
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-169
Related Commands
config modify subscriber directdial dn slot portinboard config modify subscriber directdial dn portinmainboard
3.143 config modify subscriber directdial dn portinmainboard

Function
This command is used to modify the AT0 direct dialing subscribers. In this way, other subscribers can only dial the long number of the PSTN without the extension. The calls of the subscriber are forwarded to the office by a dedicated AT0 trunk.
Syntax
config modify subscriber directdial dn <string> portinmainboard <0-7> officeno <0-254> [number <1-8>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> portinmainboard <0-7> officeno <0-254> number <1-8> Description Indicates the subscriber number. Indicates the start number of the port on the board. Indicates the office number. Indicates the number. Default Value None None None 1
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
This command is used to configure AT0 direct dialing subscriber accompanying with the MPU main board. You can configure one or multiple subscribers at a time.
Examples
To configure three AT0 direct dialing subscribers accompanying with the MPU main board with dn as 2000-2002, officeno as 1, and portinmainboard as 3, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify subscriber directdial dn 2000 portinmainboard 3 officeno 1 number 3
3-170
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Related Commands
config modify subscriber directdial disable
3.144 config modify subscriber directdial dn slot portinboard

Function
The command is used to configure the direct dial subscriber.
Syntax
config modify subscriber directdial dn <string> slot <1-4> portinboard <0-7> officeno <0-254> [number <1-8>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> slot <1-4> portinboard <0-7> officeno <0-254> number <1-8> Description Indicates the number of the start subscriber. Indicates the slot position number of the UAP2100. Indicates the start port number. Indicates the office number. Indicates the number of subscribers. Default Value None None None None 1
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Before running this command, make sure that the type pf the board in this slot position is UAP-8ATU, and the board runs normally.
Examples
When configuring two direct dial subscribers on the UAP2100, to set dn to 1000, slot to 2, portinboard to 5, officeno to 0, and number to 2, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify subscriber directdial dn 1000 slot 2 portinboard 5 officeno 0 number 2
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-171
Related Commands
config modify subscriber directdial disable
3.145 config modify subscriber dn

Function
The command is used to modify record information about the number of a subscriber.
Syntax
onfig modify subscriber dn <string> [usertype <normal | prior | operator | carduser>] [telephonist <yes | no>] [outgoingrights <inter & local & ddd & idd & cus1 & cus2 & cus3 & cus4 & cus5 & cus6 & cus7 & cus8 & cus9 & cus10 & cus11 & cus12 & cus13 & cus14 & cus15 & cus16 & cus17 & cus18 & cus19 & cus20 & cus21 & cus22 & cus23 & cus24 & cus25 & cus26 & cus27 & cus28 & cus29 & cus30 & cus31 & cus32>] [operatein <del | add>] [incomingrights < inter&local&ddd&idd>] [operatenewservice <del | add>] [newservicerights <voicemailcfu & voicemailcfb & voicemailcfnr & faxmailcfu & cfo & dds & cfu & clir & cfb & clip & cfnr & threeparty & conf & hotline & busycallback & wakeupcall & busycallsave & calllimit & secretaryservice & callwaiting & secretarystation & remoteset & absentuser & abbreviativedial & cancelallnewservices & pickupingroup & hookingtransfer & pickupspecial & ringservice & disppstndn & faxnegotiate & operatordisconnect & tonesupervision & operatorinsert & operatoroverstep & superrightsuser & supervisionoverstep & cnam & multiplecallright & colp & colr & unicall & instantconf & callpark & mfs>] [billingtype <periodic | meter | print | free | wmxppc | wmxpub>] [password <string>] [faxmode <bypass | t38 | null>] [remarkinfo <string>] [callsourceno <0-255>] [pbxgroupno <0-49>] [ringtype <0-255>] [userstate <normal | owned>] [number <1-1024>] [username <string>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> usertype <normal | prior | operator | carduser> Description Indicates the number of the subscriber. Indicates the type of the subscriber. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None normal
normal: normal subscriber prior: prior subscriber operator: attendant carduser: card subscriber None
telephonist <yes | no> outgoingrights <inter & local & ddd & idd & cus1 & cus2 & cus3 & cus4 & cus5 & cus6 & cus7 & cus8 & cus9 &
3-172
Indicates whether to set the subscriber to be the attendant position. Indicates the outgoing call right. The values are as follows:
inter: intra-office call
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameter and Value cus10 & cus11 & cus12 & cus13 & cus14 & cus15 & cus16 & cus17 & cus18 & cus19 & cus20 & cus21 & cus22 & cus23 & cus24 & cus25 & cus26 & cus27 & cus28 & cus29 & cus30 & cus31 & cus32> operatein <del | add>
Description

Default Value
local: local call ddd: national toll call idd: international toll call cus1, cus2,..., cus32: customized right 1, customized right 2,..., customized right 32
Indicates the operation type of the incoming call right. The parameter has the following value options:

None
del: delete add: add inter&local &ddd&idd
incomingrights <inter&local& ddd&idd>
Indicates the incoming call right. The parameter has the following value options:

inter: intra-office call local: local call ddd: national toll call idd: international toll call None
operatenewservice <del | add>
Indicates the operation type of the supplementary service. The parameter has the following value options:

del: delete add: add
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-173
Parameter and Value newservicerights <voicemailcfu & voicemailcfb & voicemailcfnr & faxmailcfu & cfo & dds & cfu & clir & cfb & clip & cfnr & threeparty & conf & hotline & busycallback & wakeupcall & busycallsave & calllimit & secretaryservice & callwaiting & secretarystation & remoteset & absentuser & abbreviativedial & cancelallnewservices & pickupingroup & hookingtransfer & pickupspecial & ringservice & disppstndn & faxnegotiate & operatordisconnect & tonesupervision & operatorinsert & operatoroverstep & superrightsuser & supervisionoverstep & cnam & multiplecallright & colp & colr & unicall & instantconf & callpark & mfs>
Description ndicates the right of the new service. The values are as follows:
Default Value None
voicemailcfu: call forwarding to voice mail unconditionally voicemailcfb: call forwarding to voice mail on busy voicemailcfnr: call forwarding to voice mail on no reply faxmailcfu: call forwarding to fax mail unconditionally cfo: call forwarding on offline dds: no disturbance cfu: unconditional call forwarding clir: restrict to display the calling number cfb: call forwarding busy clip: display the calling number cfnr: call forwarding on no reply threeparty: three-way calling conf: conference call hotline: hotline service busycallback: call back on busy wakeupcall: alarm-call service busycallsave: registered call on busy calllimit: call limiter secretaryservice: secretary service callwaiting: call waiting secretarystation: secretary station service remoteset: remote setting absentuser: service for absent subscriber abbreviativedial: abbreviated dialling cancelallnewservices: cancel all supplementary service pickupingroup: co-group pickup hookingtransfer: transfer the hookflash pickupspecial: specified pickup ringservice: ring service disppstndn faxnegotiate: fax-negotiation service operatordisconnect: forced released by operator tonesupervision: operator monitoring

3-174
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameter and Value
Description

Default Value
operatorinsert: attendant break-in operatoroverstep: operator emergency override superrightsuser: subscriber with super right supervisionoverstep: listening service cnam: calling name presentation service colp: called number display colr: restriction of called number display instantconf: instant conference callpark: call reservation periodic

billingtype <periodic | meter | print | free>
Indicates the billing type. The parameter has the following value options:

periodic meter print free 1234 None 0 None None bypass
password <string> ringtype <0-255> remarkinfo <string> callsourceno <0-255> pbxgroupno <0-49> faxmode <bypass | t38 | transparence>
Indicates the password of the subscriber. Four digits. Indicates the index of the ring type. Indicates the remarks information. Indicates the number of the call source. Indicates the PBX group number. Indicates the fax mode. The parameter has the following value options:

bypass t38 transparence None 1 None
userstate <normal | owned> number <1-1024> username <string>
Indicates the status of the subscriber. Indicates the number of the modified subscribers in batches. Indicates the subscriber name.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-175
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to modify the information about the number of a subscriber, such as the outgoing call right, incoming call right, and right of the new service. You can modify one item each time, or modify the items in batches. When adding the subscriber to the PXB group, you need to use the pbxgroupno parameter and the numtype parameter. The value of numtype needs to be set to pbxind or pbxnoind.When deleting the subscriber from the PBX group, set the value of numtype to normal.
Examples
For a subscriber with dn as 8000, to add this number to the PBX group 1, and set numtype to pbxind, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify subscriber dn 6018 pbxgroupno 1 numtype pbxind
Related Commands
config add subscriber domainname config delete subscriber domainname config delete subscriber dn show subscriber domainname show subscriber dn show subscriber by pbxgroupno
3.146 config modify subscriber dn newdn

Function
The command is used to modify subscriber numbers.
Syntax
config modify subscriber dn <string> newdn <string> [number <1-1024>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> newdn <string> Description Indicates the start subscriber number. Indicates the new start subscriber number. Default Value None None
3-176
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameter and Value number <1-1024>
Description Indicates the number of subscribers to be modified in batches.
Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
Run the command to modify the subscriber whose numbers are from 2000 to 2009. Set newdn to 3000 to 3009.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify subscriber dn 2000 newdn 3000 number 10
Related Commands
None.
3.147 config modify subscriber domainname

Function
The command is used to modify subscriber numbers based on domain names and subscriber codes.
Syntax
config modify subscriber domainname <string> userno <0-1023> [dn <string>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value domainname <string> userno <0-1023> Description Indicates the domain name of the MG. Indicates the code of the subscriber, corresponding to the port number of the MG. Indicates the new subscriber number. Default Value None None
dn <string>
None
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-177
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
Run the command to modify the subscriber with domainname as ag232 and userno as 2. Set dn to 8050.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify subscriber domainname ag232 userno 2 dn 8050
Related Commands
None.
3.148 config modify sysmid

Function
The command is used to configure the number of the UAP.
Syntax
config modify sysmid mid <1-253>
Parameters
Parameter and Value mid <1-253> Description Indicates the number of the UAP. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
Configure the number of the UAP as 2:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify sysmid mid 2
3-178
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Related Commands
None.
3.149 config modify tdmintesstimer

Function
The command is used to configure the delay after the TDM calling party dials the call center number.
Syntax
config modify tdmintesstimer time <0-16>
Parameters
Parameter and Value time <0-16> Description Indicates the digit-collecting delay when the calling TDM dials the INtess service. 0 indicates that delay is disabled. Default Value 3
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
Configure the delay after the TDM calling party dials the INtess service to collect digits as 8:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify tdmintesstimer time 8
Related Commands
show tdmintesstimer
3.150 config modify tgld

Function
The command is used to modify the trunk bearer.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-179
Syntax
config modify tgld callsourceno <0-255> officeno <0-254> protocol <at0bidirection | cassignalbidirection | cassignaloutgoing | pra | sip | h323> prefix <string> [peerringback <no | yes>] [cldpredeal <yes | no>] [cldindex <0-1023>] [clipredeal <yes | no>] [cliindex <0-1023>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value callsourceno <0-255> officeno <0-254> protocol <at0bidirection | cassignalbidirection | cassignaloutgoing | pra | sip | h323> Description Indicates the call source number. Indicates the office number. Indicates the adopted protocol. The parameter has the following value options:

at0bidirection: bidirectional AT0 cassignalbidirection: channel associated signaling outgoing and incoming office cassignaloutgoing: channel associated signaling outgoing office pra: PRA sip: SIP h323: H.323 None None no None no None

prefix <string> peerringback <no | yes> cldpredeal <yes | no> cldindex <0-1023> clipredeal <yes | no> cliindex <0-1023>
Indicates the prefix. Indicates whether to listen to the ring back tone from the peer end. Indicates whether to change the called number. Indicates the index number for changing the number. Indicates whether to change the calling number. Indicates the index number for changing the calling number.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to modify the trunk bearer.
3-180
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Examples
For the trunk bearer with the callsourceno as 1, officeno as 2, protocol as PRA, and prefix as123, to modify its cliindex to 23, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify tgld callsourceno 1 officeno 2 protocol pra prefix 123 clipredeal yes cliindex 23
Related Commands
config delete tgld show tgld config add tgld
3.151 config modify tts connectpara

Function
The command is used to modify the connection parameters on the TTS server.
Syntax
config modify tts connectpara servertype <srm mainsrmip <A.B.C.D> [backupsrmip <A.B.C.D> ] | ses ttsserverip <A.B.C.D> > [ttsnum <1-10> ]
Parameters
Parameter and Value servertype<srm|ses> Description srm: indicates that the BMRS is connected to the TTS server through the SRM module. ses: indicates that the BMRS is connected to the TTS server directly. mainsrmip<A.B.C.D> Indicates the IP address of the main SRM. (You need to set the value of this parameter only when the value of servertype is set to srm.) backupsrmip<A.B.C.D> Indicates the IP address of the spare SRM. (You need to set the value of this parameter only when the value of servertype is set to srm.) ttsserverip<A.B.C.D> Indicates the IP address of the TTS server. (You need to set the value of this parameter only when the value of servertype is set to ses.) None None None Default Value None
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-181
Parameter and Value ttsnum<1-10>
Description Number of available channels of the TTS resource. The value of this parameter must be equal to or smaller than the number of VP channels that is set for the resource board, and must be smaller than the triple of the number of licenses of the TTS server.Value range: 110
Default Value 10
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Examples
Modify the connection parameters of the TTS server in SES mode. The IP address of the TTS server is 192.168.102.2 and the number of available channels is 5.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify tts connectpara servertype ses ttsserverip 192.168.102.2 ttsnum 5
Related Commands
config add tts connectpara config delete tts connectpara show tts connectpara
3.152 config modify tts textpara

Function
The command is used to modify the settings of the TTS text parsing parameters .
Syntax
config modify tts textpara no <0-31> [langid <eng | chs | france | portugu | arab | deu | jap | kor | rus | ita | spa | chilean | danish |czech | polish | india >] [encodingscheme <gb_2312 | gbk | big5 | unicode | gb18030 | utf_8>] [unicodeendian <bigendian | littleendian>] [engineinfo <string>]
3-182
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <0-31> langid <eng | chs | france | portugu | arab | deu | jap | kor | rus | ita | spa | chilean | danish |czech | polish | india > Description Serial number of the TTS text parsing parameter. Indicates the start equipment ID. The values are as follows:

eng: English chs: Chinese france: French portugu: Portuguese arab: Arabic deu: German jap: Japanese kor: Korea rus: Russian ita: Italian spa: Spanish chilean: Chilean danish: Danish czech: Czech polish: Polish india: Indian None
encodingscheme <gb_2312 | gbk | big5 | unicode | gb18030 | utf_8> unicodeendian <bigendian | littleendian> engineinfo
Indicates the encoding mode.
Indicates the byte order. Indicates the name of the engine.
None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Examples
Modify the settings of the text parsing parameters on the current TTS server, the encoding mode is changed to gbk, the byte order is changed to bigendian, and the engine name is changed to acapla.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-183
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify tts textpara no 0 encodingscheme gbk unicodeendian bigendian engineinfo acapla
Related Commands
config add tts textpara config delete tts textpara show tts textpara
3.153 config modify tts voicepara

Function
The command is used to modify the settings of the voice parameters on the TTS server.
Syntax
config modify tts voicepara [sound <low | mid | high>] [voicetype <alaw | vox>] [speed <low | mid | high>] [pitch <low | mid | high>] [template <female | male>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value voicetype <alaw | vox> speed <low | mid | high> sound <low | mid | high> pitch <low | mid | high> template<female | male> Description Indicates the voice format after the TTS conversion. Indicates the voice speed after the TTS conversion. Indicates the voice volume after the TTS conversion. Indicates the vioce tone after the TTS conversion. Indicates the template of the TTS intergrated voice library. The values are as follows:

Default Value alaw mid mid mid femal
male indicates the voice of the male female indicates the voice of the female
Modes
Config.
3-184
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Usage Guidelines
Examples
Modify the settings of the voice parameters on the TTS server, the voice format after the TTS conversion is changed to vox, the voice speed, voice volume and the vioce tone after the TTS conversion are all changed to mid, the template of the TTS intergrated voice library is changed to male.
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify tts voicepara sound mid voicetype vox speed mid pitch mid template male
Related Commands
show tts voicepara config modify tts voicepara setdefault
3.154 config modify tts voicepara setdefault

Function
The command is used to set the default values of the voice parameters on the TTS server.
Syntax
config modify tts voicepara setdefault
Parameters
None.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The dafault values of the voice parameters on the TTS server are as follows:

The voice format after the TTS conversion is alaw The voice speed, voice volume and the voice tone after the TTS conversion are mid. The template of the TTS integrated voice library is femal.
Examples
To modify the settings of the voice parameters on the TTS server, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config modify tts voicepara setdefault
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-185
Related Commands
show tts voicepara config modify tts voicepara
3.155 config patch activate

Function
The command is used to activate a patch.
Syntax
config patch activate patchno <0-199>
Parameters
Parameter and Value patchno <0-199> Description Indicates the patch number. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To activate a patch with patchno as 50, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config patch activate patchno 50
Related Commands
config patch deactivate
3.156 config patch deactivate

Function
The command is used to deactivate a patch.
3-186
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Syntax
config patch deactivate patchno <0-199>
Parameters
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To deactivate a patch with patchno as 50, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config patch deactivate patchno 50
Related Commands
config patch activate
3.157 config patch delete

Function
The command is used to delete a patch.
Syntax
config patch delete patchno <0-199>
Parameters
Modes
Config.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-187
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To delete a patch with patchno as 50, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config patch delete patchno 50
Related Commands
config patch load
3.158 config patch load

Function
The command is used to load a patch to the UAP2100.
Syntax
config patch load filename <string>
Parameters
Parameter and Value filename <string> Description Indicates the name of the file. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To load a patch file patch.pat, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config patch load filename patch.pat
Related Commands
config patch save config patch deactivate
3-188
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3.159 config patch save

Function
The command is used to save the patch to the FLASH.
Syntax
config patch save
Parameters
None.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To save the patch to the FLASH, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config patch save
Related Commands
config patch load
3.160 config potscp dtmf send mode

Function
This command is used to configure the sending mode of DTMF.
Syntax
config potscp dtmf send mode <cdsp | tdsp>
Parameters
Parameter and Value mode <cdsp | tdsp> Description Indicates the sending mode of DTMF:

Default Value None
Coding and decoding DSP General DSP
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-189
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To configure the sending mode of DTMF to coding and decoding DSP, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config potscp dtmf send mode cdsp
To configure the sending mode of DTMF to general DSP, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config potscp dtmf send mode tdsp
Related Commands
show potscp dtmf send mode
3.161 config pra huawei

Function
The command is used to set the switch of the software parameter.
Syntax
config pra huawei <off | on>
Parameters
Parameter and Value huawei <off | on> Description Indicates the switch of the software parameter. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
3-190
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Examples
To set the switch of the software parameter, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config pra huawei on
Related Commands
show pra huawei
3.162 config pra pseudo alerting

Function
This command is used to set the PRA pseudo alerting mode switch.
Syntax
config pra pseudo alerting mode <enable | disable>
Parameters
Parameter and Value mode <enable | disable> Description Indicates the mode is enabled or disabled. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To enable the PRA pseudo alerting mode switch, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config pra pseudo alerting mode enable
Related Commands
show pra pseudo alerting
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-191
3.163 config protocol at0

Function
The command is used to set the AT0 protocol, such as the office number, and the select-line mode of the AT0 trunk.
Syntax
config protocol at0 officeno <0-254> [selectlinemode <sortasc | sortdrop | poll>] [defaultcldnum1 <string>] [defaultcldnum2 <string>] [owndevice <yes | no>] [transformotmn <yes | no>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value officeno <0-254> selectlinemode <sortasc | sortdrop | poll> Description Indicates the office number of the AT0 protocol. Indicates the mode of the AT0 trunk for selecting the line. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None poll
sortasc: minimum line-selecting mode sortdrop: maximum line-selecting mode poll: poll selection None None None None
defaultcldnum1 <string> defaultcldnum2 <string> owndevice <yes | no> transformotmn <yes | no>
Indicates the default incoming number 1. Indicates the default incoming number 2. Indicates whether it is the Huawei device. Indicates whether to display the OTMN long number.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The maximum line-selecting mode indicates to select from the circuit with max. No. in the line-selecting queue; the minimum line-selecting mode indicates to select from the circuit with min. No. in the line-selecting queue. Such selection decreases the dual seizure rate.
Examples
For an AT0 protocol, to set its officeno to 0, selectlinemode to sortasc, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config protocol at0 officeno 0 selectlinemode sortasc
3-192
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Related Commands
show protocol
3.164 config protocol cassignal

Function
The command is used to set channel associated signaling, such as the trunk circuit direction, default calling number.
Format
config protocol cassignal officeno <0-254> direction <bidirection | outgoing | incoming> casname <string> [selectlinemode <sortasc | sortdrop | poll>] [seizepos <0-24>] [requestcli <no | yes>] [requestclipos <1-32>] [defaultclinum <string>] [defaultcldnum1 <string>] [defaultcldnum2 <string>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value officeno <0-254> direction <bidirection | outgoing | incoming> Description Indicates the trunk office number of channel associated signaling. Indicates the direction of the trunk circuit. The options are as follows:

bidirection: bio-directional outgoing: outgoing direction incoming: incoming direction None poll
casname <string> selectlinemode <sortasc | sortdrop | poll>
Indicates the name of channel associated signaling. Indicates the mode for selecting the line. The options are as follows:

sortasc: minimum line-selecting mode sortdrop: maximum line-selecting mode poll: poll selection 1
seizepos <0-24>
Indicates the Seizure point of the trunk. The system sends the number length to the opposite office only when reaching the minimum number length. Indicates whether to request the calling number. Indicates that the trunk reports the calling number only when the received calling number is of this length.
requestcli <no | yes> requestclipos <1-32>
no 1
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-193
Parameter and Value defaultclinum <string> defaultcldnum1 <string> defaultcldnum2 <string>
Description Indicates the default calling number. Indicates the default called number 1. Indicates the default called number 2.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To configure the trunk outgoing office number of channel associated signaling as 1, with the name as ChinaNo1, the line-selecting mode as the poll, the seizure point of the trunk as 1, the default calling number as 1000, the seizure point of the called trunk as 1, the default calling subscriber type as the ordinary periodic subscriber, service type of the default originating call as the local call, and the seizure point of the calling trunk as 1, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config protocol cassignal officeno 1 direction bidirection casname ChinaNo1 selectlinemode poll seizepos 1 requestcli yes requestclipos 1 defaultclinum 1000
Related Commands
show protocol.
3.165 config protocol h323 disable officeno

Function
The command is used to disable the H.323 trunk group of the specified office.
Syntax
config protocol h323 disable officeno <0-254>
Parameters
Parameter and Value officeno <0-254> Description Indicates the office number of the H.323 protocol. Default Value None
3-194
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To disable the H.323 trunk group with the officeno as 3, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config protocol h323 disable officeno 3
Related Commands
None.
3.166 config protocol h323 officeno domainname

Function
The command is used to set the H.323 protocol. The profile to be set includes the SS component name of the peer office, the signaling port number of the H.323 protocol of the peer office, the maximum call number bore by the trunk group, whether to enable the fast-start call, and the office number of the H.323 trunk group.
Syntax
config protocol h323 officeno <0-254> domainname <string> peersignalport <1-65535> faststart <disable | enable> maxcallnum <1-256> [defaultcldnum1 <string>] [defaultcldnum2 <string>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value domainname <string> peersignalport <1-65535> maxcallnum <1-256> faststart <disable | enable> officeno <0-254> Description Indicates the name of the added SS component of the peer office. Indicates the signaling port number of the H.323 protocol of the peer office. Indicates the maximum call number born by this trunk group. Indicates whether to enable the fast-start call. Indicates the office number of the H.323 trunk group to be set. Default Value None 1720 None disable None
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-195
Parameter and Value defaultcldnum1 <string> defaultcldnum2 <string>
Description Indicates default number 1 of the trunk circuit group. Indicates default number 2 of the trunk circuit group.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to set the information on the opposite H323 device.
Examples
For the H323 protocol with local office number as 3, to set its domainname of peer office components to 9500nax, peersignalport to 2000, maxcallnum to 255, and faststart to no, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config protocol h323 officeno 3 domainname 9500nax peersignalport 2000 faststart disable maxcallnum 255
Related Commands
None.
3.167 config protocol h323 signalport

Function
The command is used to set the H323 information, including the signaling port number and the start port number of the TCP.
Syntax
config protocol h323 signalport <1-65535> tcpstartport <1-65000>
Parameters
Parameter and Value signalport <1-65535> tcpstartport <1-65000> Description Indicates the signaling port number of the H.323 protocol of the device. Indicates the start port number of the TCP. Default Value 1720 5000
3-196
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To set signalport to 1720, and tcpstartport to 5000, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config protocol h323 signalport 1720 tcpstartport 5000
Related Commands
None.
3.168 config protocol pra

Function
The command is used to set the PRA protocol, including the line-selecting mode of the PRA trunk group and the default incoming number..
Syntax
config protocol pra officeno <0-254> [selectlinemode <sortasc | sortdrop | poll>] [defaultcldnum1 <string>] [defaultcldnum2 <string>] [typeofcldnumber <unknown | international | national | networkspecific | subscriber | in | abbreviated | reservedforextension | default>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value officeno <0-254> selectlinemode <sortasc | sortdrop | poll> Description Indicates the office of the PRA trunk group. Indicates the mode of the pra trunk for selecting the line. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None poll
sortasc: minimum line-selecting mode sortdrop: maximum line-selecting mode poll: poll selection None None
defaultcldnum1 <string> defaultcldnum2 <string>
Indicates the default incoming number 1. Indicates the default incoming number 2.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-197
Parameter and Value typeofcldnumber <unknown | international | national | networkspecific | subscriber | in | abbreviated | reservedforextension | default>
Description Indicates the type of the called number.
Default Value default
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The default incoming number is used to set the forwarding service and the secretary station service.
Examples
For the PRA trunk group with the office number as 2, to modify its selectlinemode to sortasc, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config protocol pra officeno 2 selectlinemode sortasc
Related Commands
None.
3.169 config protocol sip disable officeno

Function
This command is used to disable the SIP trunk group of a specified office number.
Syntax
config protocol sip disable officeno <0-254>
Parameters
Parameter and Value officeno <0-254> Description Indicates the office number of the SIP. Default Value None
3-198
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To disable the SIP trunk group whose office number is 3, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config protocol sip disable officeno 3
Related Commands
None.
3.170 config protocol sip officeno

Function
This command is used to set the SIP protocol, including the office number of the trunk group, the added peer office component name, the signaling port number of the SIP protocol of the peer office, and the maximum call number bore by the trunk group.
Syntax
config protocol sip officeno <0-254> domainname <string> [peerport <0-6000>] [maxcallnum <1-255>] [defaultcldnum1 <string>] [defaultcldnum2 <string>] [owndevice<yes | no>] [transformotmn<yes | no>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value officeno <0-254> domainname <string> peerport <0-6000> maxcallnum <1-255> defaultcldnum1 <string> defaultcldnum2 <string> Description Indicates the office number of the trunk group. Indicates the domain name of the added peer office component. Indicates the signaling port number of the SIP protocol of the peer office. Indicates the maximum call number born by this trunk group. Indicates default number 1 of the trunk circuit group. Indicates default number 2 of the trunk circuit group. Default Value None None 5060 None None None
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-199
Parameter and Value owndevice<yes | no> transformotmn<yes | no>
Description Indicates if device of huawei. Indicates whether to transform otmn.
Default Value no no
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
For the SIP trunk group with officeno as 2, to set domainname to 9500nax, peerport to 5060, and maxcallnum to 255, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config protocol sip officeno 2 domainname 9500nax peerport 5060 maxcallnum 255
Related Commands
config add peercomponent show protocol
3.171 config siplocalgenerate disable

Function
This command is used to disable the function of simple local regeneration of the SIP trunk. Serving as a gateway, the UAP2100 communicates with the upper level UAP through the SIP trunk. If the SIP trunk is disconnected, the local regeneration function is disabled.
Syntax
config siplocalgenerate disable prefixdn <string>
Parameters
Parameter and Value prefixdn <string> Description Indicates the prefix to which the SIP trunk corresponds. Default Value None
3-200
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To disable the local regeneration function of the SIP trunk, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config siplocalgenerate disable prefixdn 1234
Output
None.
Related Commands
config siplocalgenerate enable show siplocalgenerate
3.172 config siplocalgenerate enable

Function
This command is used to enable the function of simple local regeneration of the SIP trunk. Serving as a gateway, the UAP2100 communicates with the upper level UAP through the SIP trunk. If the SIP trunk is disconnected, the call can be transferred to the local agent of the UAP through the function of simple local regeneration of the SIP trunk.
Syntax
config siplocalgenerate enable prefixdn <string>
Parameters
Parameter and Value prefixdn <string> Description Indicates the prefix to which the SIP trunk corresponds. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-201
Usage Guidelines
Before running this command, add the prefix to which the SIP trunk corresponds.
Examples
To enable the local regeneration function of the SIP trunk, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config siplocalgenerate enable prefixdn 1234
Output
None.
Related Commands
config siplocalgenerate disable show siplocalgenerate
3.173 config system clocksource oscillator

Function
The command is used to delete the clock source of the system.
Syntax
config system clocksource oscillator
Parameters
None.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To delete the clock source information on the system, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config system clocksource oscillator
Related Commands
config system clocksource primaryslot
3-202
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3.174 config system clocksource primaryslot

Function
The command is used to set the TDM clock source of the system.
Syntax
config system clocksource primaryslot <1-4> primarye1 <0-3> [standbyslot <1-4>] [standbye1 <1-4>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value primaryslot <1-4> primarye1 <0-3> Description Indicates the number of the slot where the active clock source resides. Indicates the E1 number of the active clock source. The value range varies according to the card type. Indicates the number of the slot where the standby clock source resides. Indicates the E1 number of the standby clock source. The value range varies according to the card type. Default Value None None
standbyslot <1-4>
Number of the slot where the active clock source resides E1 number of the active clock source
standbye1 <1-4>
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Before running this command, check whether the type of the board in the target slot position is UAP-DTU.
Examples
To set a TDM clock source with primaryslot as 3, primarye1 as 2, standbyslot as 2, and standbye1 as 1, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config system clocksource primaryslot 3 primarye1 2 standbyslot 2 standbye1 1
Related Commands
config system clocksource oscillator show system clocksource information
3.175 config system supportcodetype

Function
The command is used to set the voice coding and decoding type supported by the system.
Syntax
config system supportcodetype <g711a&g711u&g729&g723>
Parameters
Parameter and Value supportcodetype <g711a&g711u&g729& g723> Description Indicates the type of the optional voice coding and decoding type. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None
G.711a G.711 G.729 G.723
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To set the system to support the coding and decoding type G.711a, G.711u, G.729, and G.723 at the same time, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config system supportcodetype g711a&g729&g711u&g723
Related Commands
None.
3.176 config system domainname

Function
The command is used to set the system domain name of the UAP2100.
3-204
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Syntax
config system domainname <string>
Parameters
Parameter and Value domainname <string> Description Indicates the domain name. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The system domain name to be set cannot be same to the domain name of the existent device.
Examples
To set the domain name to KeJiDaSha, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config system domainname KeJiDaSha
Related Commands
show system information
3.177 config system gateway

Function
The command is used to set the gateway IP address of the UAP2100.
Syntax
config system gateway ip <A.B.C.D>
Parameters
Parameter and Value ip <A.B.C.D> Description Indicates the gateway IP address. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-205
Usage Guidelines
The gateway refers to the device implementing the information exchange between different networks. To ensure the connection between the local device and the devices on other networks, you must ensure the connection between the local device and the local gateway. After setting the gateway IP address, you can test the network continuity between the device and the gateway through the ping command.
Examples
To set the gateway IP address to 192.168.0.254, run the following command:
3.178 config system hostip

Function
The command is used to set the IP address of the load server of the UAP2100.
Syntax
config system hostip <A.B.C.D>
Parameters
Parameter and Value hostip <A.B.C.D> Description Indicates the IP address of the load server. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Before loading the system, you need to set the IP address of the load server where the program and data are saved. In the loading process, the device will access the load server and download the program and data.
Examples
To set the gateway IP address to 192.168.0.254, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config system gateway ip 192.168.0.254
To test the network continuity, run the following command:

[%UAP2100(config)]# ping 192.168.0.254
Related Commands
show sytem information
3-206
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3.179 config system ip

Function
The command is used to configure the IP address and the subnet mask of the UAP2100.
Syntax
config system ip <A.B.C.D/M>
Parameters
Parameter and Value ip <A.B.C.D/M> Description Indicates the IP address and the subnet mask. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Make sure that the configured IP address and the subnet mask is same to that of the actual value. After running this command, you need to save the configuration and reset the system to take effects the configuration.
Examples
Assume that the IP address to be configured is 192.168.0.100, and the subnet mask to be configured is 24 digits. The operation procedure is as follows: Step 1 Configure the IP address of the device running the config system ip command shown as follows:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config system ip 192.168.0.100/24
Step 2 View the configuration result by running the show system information command. Check whether the value of IP is 192.168.0.100 in the returned result. Step 3 Save the configuration data by running the save command. Step 4 Restart the device by running the reboot command. ----End
Related Commands
show sytem information
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-207
3.180 config upload

Function
The command is used to upload files from UAP2100 to TFTP server.
Syntax
config upload file <all | argboot2 | data | fpga | lastwords | voice | voip | dsp | subbox | mainnode | commandxml | alarmxml | boardxml | dbconfig | featuresxml | arg | wimaxdccxml | clixml>
Parameters
Parameter and Value file <all | argboot2 | data | fpga | lastwords | voice | voip | dsp | subbox | mainnode | commandxml | alarmxml | boardxml | dbconfig | featuresxml | arg | wimaxdccxml | clixml> Description

Default Value None.
all:all the program files argboot2:level-2 boot program on the ARG data: the configuration data fpga: the FPGA file lastwords:black box information voice: voice file voip: the file of the codec DSP chip dsp: the kernel file of the DSP board subbox: the software file of subbox mainnode: the software of the 51 chip commandxml: the command resource file of GUI network management system alarmxml: the alarm resource file of GUI network management system boardxml: the board resource file of GUI network management system dbconfig: the file of the table structure featuresxml: the configuration files of new features of OMU arg:Indicates the host software of the active board. wimaxdccxml: charging script file clixml: CLI file

Modes
Config.
3-208
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Usage Guidelines
Before running this command, you must pay much attention to the following:
Run show system information to check whether the Host IP address is consistent with the IP address of the PC installed with the TFTP server. If not, run config system hostip to change the Host IP address to the IP address of the PC installed with the TFTP server. To ensure that the TFTP server works properly.
Examples
Upload all files from UAP2100 to TFTP server:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config upload file data
Related Commands
config download
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
3-209
Contents
Contents
4 Display Commands ...................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 display cp by .................................................................................................................................................4-2 4.2 display cpchannel ..........................................................................................................................................4-3 4.3 display fp by..................................................................................................................................................4-5 4.4 display fpchannel ..........................................................................................................................................4-6 4.5 display vp by .................................................................................................................................................4-8 4.6 display vpchannel..........................................................................................................................................4-9 4.7 show aminfo ................................................................................................................................................ 4-11 4.8 show anonymouscall ...................................................................................................................................4-12 4.9 show at0tkc card..........................................................................................................................................4-13 4.10 show at0tkc mpu .......................................................................................................................................4-14 4.11 show autosave switch ................................................................................................................................4-15 4.12 show callpurview ......................................................................................................................................4-15 4.13 show callsourceno .....................................................................................................................................4-16 4.14 show card ..................................................................................................................................................4-17 4.15 show ccm billforat0...................................................................................................................................4-18 4.16 show cdsp argu ..........................................................................................................................................4-18 4.17 show component........................................................................................................................................4-19 4.18 show component domainname ..................................................................................................................4-20 4.19 show component type................................................................................................................................4-21 4.20 show cp .....................................................................................................................................................4-23 4.21 show createbill switch ...............................................................................................................................4-24 4.22 show ctinfo ................................................................................................................................................4-24 4.23 show device...............................................................................................................................................4-26 4.24 show disconnectrecord ..............................................................................................................................4-27 4.25 show dspchannel .......................................................................................................................................4-27 4.26 show fp......................................................................................................................................................4-29 4.27 show hostprefix .........................................................................................................................................4-30 4.28 show interface ...........................................................................................................................................4-31 4.29 show license ..............................................................................................................................................4-33 4.30 show line report.........................................................................................................................................4-35 4.31 show line send ...........................................................................................................................................4-36
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Contents
4.32 show localcrbt ...........................................................................................................................................4-37 4.33 show localgw.............................................................................................................................................4-38 4.34 show localvpchannel .................................................................................................................................4-39 4.35 show logserverinfo ....................................................................................................................................4-39 4.36 show mfpstop overtime .............................................................................................................................4-40 4.37 show mg ....................................................................................................................................................4-41 4.38 show mpu ..................................................................................................................................................4-42 4.39 show mrainfo.............................................................................................................................................4-43 4.40 show net alarm ..........................................................................................................................................4-44 4.41 show nfs ....................................................................................................................................................4-46 4.42 show nirc prefix.........................................................................................................................................4-48 4.43 show numdeal............................................................................................................................................4-49 4.44 show office ................................................................................................................................................4-50 4.45 show office selectcode...............................................................................................................................4-51 4.46 show peercomponent.................................................................................................................................4-52 4.47 show potscp dtmf send ..............................................................................................................................4-53 4.48 show pra huawei........................................................................................................................................4-53 4.49 show pra pseudo alerting mode .................................................................................................................4-54 4.50 show pralink ..............................................................................................................................................4-55 4.51 show predeal..............................................................................................................................................4-56 4.52 show prefix................................................................................................................................................4-56 4.53 show prefix callcategory ...........................................................................................................................4-57 4.54 show protocol ............................................................................................................................................4-60 4.55 show pstndeal ............................................................................................................................................4-61 4.56 show ringrelate ..........................................................................................................................................4-62 4.57 show ringservice........................................................................................................................................4-63 4.58 show ringtype ............................................................................................................................................4-64 4.59 show running time.....................................................................................................................................4-65 4.60 show seatno ...............................................................................................................................................4-65 4.61 show sip parameter....................................................................................................................................4-67 4.62 show siplocalgenerate ...............................................................................................................................4-67 4.63 show sipselect............................................................................................................................................4-68 4.64 show sipue.................................................................................................................................................4-70 4.65 show sptfile relation ..................................................................................................................................4-70 4.66 show staticgw ............................................................................................................................................4-72 4.67 show statpara.............................................................................................................................................4-72 4.68 show statswitch .........................................................................................................................................4-73 4.69 show subbox..............................................................................................................................................4-74 4.70 show subscriber.........................................................................................................................................4-76 4.71 show subscriber by callsourceno...............................................................................................................4-77 4.72 show subscriber by pbxgroupno................................................................................................................4-78 4.73 show subscriber dn type ............................................................................................................................4-78
ii
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Contents
4.74 show subscriber domainname ...................................................................................................................4-80 4.75 show subscriber filter ................................................................................................................................4-81 4.76 show subscriber pots .................................................................................................................................4-83 4.77 show subscriber state.................................................................................................................................4-85 4.78 show subscriber subbox ............................................................................................................................4-86 4.79 show system clocksource information.......................................................................................................4-88 4.80 show system information ..........................................................................................................................4-88 4.81 show system media consult switch............................................................................................................4-89 4.82 show system time ......................................................................................................................................4-90 4.83 show tdmintesstimer..................................................................................................................................4-91 4.84 show tgld ...................................................................................................................................................4-92 4.85 show tkc slot..............................................................................................................................................4-93 4.86 show tkc slot portinboard ..........................................................................................................................4-95 4.87 show tts connectpara .................................................................................................................................4-97 4.88 show tts textpara........................................................................................................................................4-98 4.89 show tts voicepara .....................................................................................................................................4-99 4.90 show version............................................................................................................................................4-100 4.91 show vp ...................................................................................................................................................4-101
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
iii
4 Display Commands
4
About This Chapter
Display Commands
This chapter describes the functions, syntax, parameters, modes, usage guidelines, examples, and related commands of the display commands of the UAP2100. You can get familiar with each display command by reading this chapter.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-1
4 Display Commands
4.1 display cp by
Function
The command is used to display the real-time status of a CP.
Syntax
display cp by cpno <0-254>
Parameters
Parameter and Value cpno <0-254> Description Indicates the number of a CP. Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
The records of the specified CP number already exist. By using the command show cp, you can view the existing CP records.
Examples
View the real-time status of CP 10:
[%UAP2100]> display cp by cpno 10 CP Information CPNo Status ---- -----10 ACTIVE
Output
After running the command successfully, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field CPNo Status Description Indicates the number of a CP. Indicates the status of a CP.
4-2
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
Related Commands
config add cp config modify cp config delete cp show cp display cpchannel
4.2 display cpchannel

Function
The command is used to display the real-time status of the channels of a CP.
Syntax
display cpchannel cpno <0-254>
Parameters
Parameter and Value cpno <0-254> Description Indicates the number of a CP. Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
The records of the specified CP number already exist.
Examples
View the real-time status of the channels of CP 10:
[%UAP2100]> display cpchannel cpno 10 CP Channel Information CPNo E1PortNo SlotNo SlotE1No ChannleNo Status ---- -------- ------ -------- --------- ----------------10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 UNINSTALL IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-3
4 Display Commands
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE UNINSTALL IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE
------- Matched record number : [32] -------
Output
After running the command succeeds, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field CPNo E1PortNo SlotNo SlotE1No ChannleNo Status Description Indicates the number of a CP. Indicates the number of the E1 port on the CP voice card. Indicates the slot number of the board used to connect the UAP to the CP. Indicates the number of the E1 port that connects the UAP to the CP. Indicates the number of a CP channel. Indicates the status of the channels of a CP.
Related Commands
config add cp config modify cp config delete cp show cp
4-4
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
display cp by
4.3 display fp by
Function
The command is used to display the real-time status of an FP.
Syntax
display fp by fpno <0-254>
Parameters
Parameter and Value fpno <0-254> Description Indicates the number of an FP. Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
The records of the specified FP number already exist. By using the command show fp, you can view the existing FP records.
Examples
View the real-time status of FP 10:
[%UAP2100]> display fp by fpno 10 FP Information FPNo Status ---- -----10 ACTIVE
Output
After running the command succeeds, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field FPNo Status Description Indicates the number of an FP. Indicates the status of an FP.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-5
4 Display Commands
Related Commands
config add fp config modify fp config delete fp show fp display fpchannel
4.4 display fpchannel

Function
The command is used to display the real-time status of the channels of an FP.
Syntax
display fpchannel fpno <0-254>
Parameters
Parameter and Value fpno <0-254> Description Indicates the number of an FP. Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
The records of the specified FP number already exist.
Examples
View the real-time status of the channels of FP 10:
[%UAP2100]> display fpchannel fpno 10 FP Channel Information FPNo E1PortNo SlotNo SlotE1No ChannleNo Status ---- -------- ------ -------- --------- ----------------10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 UNINSTALL IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE
4-6
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE UNINSTALL IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE
4 Display Commands
Output
After running the command succeeds, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field FPNo E1PortNo SlotNo SlotE1No ChannleNo Status Description Indicates the number of an FP. Indicates the number of the E1 port on the FP voice card. Indicates the slot number of the board used to connect the UAP to the CP. Indicates the number of the E1 port that connects the UAP to the FP. Indicates the number of an FP channel. Indicates the status of the channels of an FP.
Related Commands
config add fp config modify fp config delete fp show fp
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-7
4 Display Commands
display fp by
4.5 display vp by
Function
The command is used to display the real-time status of a VP.
Syntax
display vp by vpno <0-254>
Parameters
Parameter and Value vpno <0-254> Description Indicates the number of a VP. Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
The records of the specified VP number already exist. By using the command show vp, you can view the existing VP records.
Examples
View the real-time status of VP 10:
[%UAP2100]> display vp by vpno 10 VP Information VPNo Status ---- -----10 ACTIVE
Output
After running the command succeeds, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field VPNo Status Description Indicates the number of a VP. Indicates the status of a VP.
4-8
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
Related Commands
config add vp config delete vp show vp display vpchannel
4.6 display vpchannel

Function
The command is used to display the real-time status of the channels of a VP.
Syntax
display vpchannel vpno <0-254>
Parameters
Parameter and Value vpno <0-254> Description Indicates the number of a VP. Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
The records of the specified VP number already exist.
Examples
View the real-time status of the channels of VP 10:
[%UAP2100]> display vpchannel vpno 10 VP Channel Information VPNo E1PortNo SlotNo SlotE1No ChannleNo Status ---- -------- ------ -------- --------- -------10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 UNINSTALL IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-9
4 Display Commands
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE UNINSTALL IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE IDLE
Output
After running the command succeeds, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field VPNo E1PortNo SlotNo SlotE1No ChannleNo Status Description Indicates the number of a VP. Indicates the number of the E1 port on the VP voice card. Indicates the number of the slot where the board connecting the UAP to the VP resides. Indicates the number of the E1 port that connects the UAP to the VP. Indicates the number of a VP channel. Indicates the status of the channels of a VP.
Related Commands
config add vp config delete vp show vp display vp by
4-10
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
4.7 show aminfo

Function
The command is used to view the information about the AM that is connected to the UAP.
Syntax
show aminfo
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
View the information about the AM that is connected to the UAP:
[%UAP2100]> show aminfo AM Information AMID GROUPID AMIP 0 1 2 3 0 0 1 1 192.168.101.67 192.168.101.81 192.168.101.77 AMPORT AMSTATE 6553 MASTER_SERVER 6553 DISCONNECT 6553 BACKUP ---- ------- --------------- ------ ------------192.168.101.149 6553 SLAVE_SERVER
Output
After running the command succeeds, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field AMID GROUPID AMIP AMPORT AMSTATE Description Indicates the ID of the AM. Indicates the ID of the AM group. Indicates the IP address of the AM. Indicates the port number of the AM. Indicates the status of the AM.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-11
4 Display Commands
Related Commands
config add am config delete am
4.8 show anonymouscall

Function
The command is used to view the information about the anonymous call.
Syntax
show anonymouscall
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
View the information about the anonymous call:
[%UAP2100]> show anonymouscall officeno maxcallnum ----1 ------24
Output
After running the command succeeds, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field officeno maxcallnum Description Indicates the number of the office direction of the anonyous call. Indicates the maximum number of the anymous calls.
4-12
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
Related Commands
config add anonymouscall config delete anonymouscall
4.9 show at0tkc card

Function
This command is used to view the circuit information on the AT0 card.
Syntax
show at0tkc card slot <1-4>
Parameters
Parameter and Value slot <1-4> Description Slot number Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
Before you view the information on the AT0 card, ensure that the AT0 card is inserted in that slot and the circuit runs normally.
Examples
To view the circuit information on the AT0 card that is in slot 3, run the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show at0tkc card slot 3 PortNo Resistance CodecType Gain DirectDialdn ------ ---------- --------- ---- -----------0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 COMPLEX COMPLEX COMPLEX COMPLEX COMPLEX COMPLEX COMPLEX COMPLEX ALaw ALaw ALaw ALaw ALaw ALaw ALaw ALaw 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 -
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-13
4 Display Commands
Related Commands
None.
4.10 show at0tkc mpu

Function
This command is used to view the circuit information on the AT0 card accompanying with the MPU main board.
Syntax
show at0tkc mpu
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To view the circuit information on the AT0 card accompanying with the MPU main board, run the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show at0tkc mpu PortNo Resistance CodecType Gain DirectDialDn ------ ---------- --------- ---- -----------0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 COMPLEX COMPLEX COMPLEX COMPLEX COMPLEX COMPLEX COMPLEX COMPLEX ALaw ALaw ALaw ALaw ALaw ALaw ALaw ALaw 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -
Related Commands
None.
4-14
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
4.11 show autosave switch

Function
The command is used to check the state of the autosave switch.
Syntax
show autosave switch
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
The command is used to check the state of the autosave switch.
[%UAP2100]> show autosave switch Auto Save Flash: disable
Related Commands
config autosave
4.12 show callpurview

Function
The command is used to query the authority of restricting calls.
Syntax
show callpurview [k <0-9>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value k <0-9> Description Indicates the option for restricting outgoing calls. Default Value None
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-15
4 Display Commands
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
The command is used to query the outgoing call authority of corresponding value of k.
Examples
Showing the corresponding call restriction authority, when the k value is 4.
[%UAP2100]> show callpurview k 4 K LimitRights ------------- - -------------------------------4 CentrexIn/CentrexOut/inter/local
Related Commands
config add callpurview config modify callpurview config delete callpurview
4.13 show callsourceno

Function
The command is used to query the serial number of a call source.
Syntax
show callcourceno
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To query the serial number of a call source, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show callsourceno
4-16
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)

CallSource NumberNetwork RouteSelectSourceCode ---------- ------------- --------------------0 1 0 0 0 1
4 Display Commands
Related Commands
config add callsource config delete callsource
4.14 show card

Function
This command is used to view the card information.
Syntax
show card [slot <1-4>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value slot <1-4> Description Slot number Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To view the card information that is in slot 1, run the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show card slot 1 Shelf Slot Type State CPUUsage MemoryUsage ----- ---- ---- ----- -------- ----------0 1 DTU FAULT -----
Related Commands
show device show mpu
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-17
4 Display Commands
show subscriber
4.15 show ccm billforat0

Function
The command is used to query the state of the switch for generating AT0 bills.
Syntax
show ccm billforat0 switch
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To query the state of the switch for generating AT0 bills, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show ccm billforat0 switch Ccm Bill For Ato switch : 1 on
Related Commands
config ccm billforat0
4.16 show cdsp argu

Function
The command is used to query the software parameters configuration of the CDSP.
Syntax
show cdsp argu
Parameters
None.
4-18
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To query the software parameters configuration of the CDSP, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show cdsp argu CDSP Arguments Faxmode: 1 T38RedIEPNum: 3 T38TCFMode: 0 CheckRTPPackIP: 0 CheckRTPPackUDP: 0 ECAN: 4 gain: 1 dtmfpowerlevel: 9 DTMFOnTime: 100 DTMFOffTime: 100 RFC2833Switch: 0 RFC2198Switch: 0
Related Commands
config cdsp rfc2833 config cdsp config cdsp dtmf config cdsp fax config cdsp rfc2198
4.17 show component

Function
The command is used to query details of components.
Syntax
show component [compid <0-1023>] [number <1-1024>]
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-19
4 Display Commands
Parameters
Parameter and Value compid <0-1023> number <1-1024> Description Indicate the ID of a component type. Indicates the number of components displayed in each screen. Default Value None 1
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines

Not to set any parameter to query the information on all components. Set the parameter compid to query the information on all components of specified type.
Examples
To query the information on the components whose type is 3 and display 10 records on each screen, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show component compid 3 number 10 DomainName IP ag232 Protocol UserNum MGPort MGCPort RFC2833 CodeType 32 2427 2727 NO G711A ---------- ------------- -------- ------- ------ ------- ------- -------192.168.0.232 MGCP Pktmin/Pktmax GainControl SilenceSupression EchoCancel DigitMap HeartBeat ------------- ----------- ----------------- ---------- -------- --------20/20 0 ENABLE DISABLE NO YES HeartBeatPeriod CommState/ServiceState --------------- ---------------------120 FAULT/LOGOUT
Related Commands
None.
4.18 show component domainname

Function
Use this command to query the information on components according to domain names.
Syntax
show component domainname <string>
4-20
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
Parameters
Parameter and Value domainname <string> Description Indicates the domain name of a component. Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To query the information on the component whose domain name is ag232, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show component domainname ag232 DomainName IP ag232 Protocol UserNum MGPort MGCPort RFC2833 CodeType 32 2427 2727 NO G711A ---------- ------------- -------- ------- ------ ------- ------- -------192.168.0.232 MGCP Pktmin/Pktmax GainControl SilenceSupression EchoCancel DigitMap HeartBeat ------------- ----------- ----------------- ---------- -------- --------20/20 0 ENABLE DISABLE NO YES HeartBeatPeriod CommState/ServiceState --------------- ---------------------120 FAULT/LOGOUT
Related Commands
config add mg config add peercomponent
4.19 show component type

Function
The command is used to query the details of components according to types.
Syntax
show component type <ss | ag | cmu | ssx | pots> [compid <1-1023>] [number <1-1024>]
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-21
4 Display Commands
Parameters
Parameter and Value type <ss | ag | cmu | ssx | pots> Description Indicates the component types:

Default Value None
ss: softswitch ag: access gateway ssx: external softswitch pots: POTS phone None 1
compid <0-1023> number <1-1024>
Indicates the number of the component types. Indicates the number of the components displayed on each screen.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To query the information on the component whose type is ag and type number is 3; display 10 records on each screen, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show component type ag compid 3 number 10 DomainName IP ag232 test CodeType G711A Protocol UserNum MGPort MGCPort RFC2833 32 20 2427 2427 2727 2727 NO NO ---------- ------------- -------- ------- ------ ------- ------192.168.0.232 MGCP 1.1.1.1 MGCP
PktMin/PktMax GainControl SilenceSupression EchoCancel 20/20 0 0 ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE
---------------------- ------------- ----------- ----------------- ---------G711A/G711Mu/G729/G723 30/30
DigitMap HeartBeat HeartBeatPeriod CommState/ServiceState -------- --------- --------------- ---------------------NO NO YES YES 120 120 FAULT/LOGOUT FAULT/LOGOUT
Related Commands
None.
4-22
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
4.20 show cp
Function
The command is used to view all CP configuration records.
Syntax
show cp
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
View all CP configuration records:
[%UAP2100]> show cp CP Information CPNo E1PortNo SlotNo SlotE1No ---- -------- ------ -------10 0 1 0
Output
After running the command succeeds, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field CPNo E1PortNo SlotNo SlotE1No Description Indicates the number of a CP. Indicates the number of the E1 port on the CP voice card. Indicates the slot number of the board used to connect the UAP to the CP. Indicates the number of the E1 port that connects the UAP to the CP.
Related Commands
config add cp config modify cp
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-23
4 Display Commands
config delete cp display cp by display cpchannel
4.21 show createbill switch

Function
The command is used to query the switch for creating bills.
Syntax
show createbill switch
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
Open the switch to enable the UAP2100 to create bills; otherwise UAP2100 does not create bills.
Examples
To check whether the switch is opened, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show createbill switch Createbill switch is [ ON ]
Related Commands
config createbill
4.22 show ctinfo

Function
The command is used to view the information about the CTI that is connected to the UAP.
Syntax
show ctinfo
4-24
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
View the information about the CTI that is connected to the UAP:
[%UAP2100]> show ctinfo CTI Information CTIID GROUPID CTIIP 0 1 2 3 0 0 1 1 192.168.101.67 192.168.101.81 192.168.101.70 CTIPORT CTISTATE 5600 5600 5600 MASTER_SERVER SLAVE_SERVER DISCONNECT BACKUP ----- ------- --------------- ------- ------------192.168.101.149 5600
Output
After running the command succeeds, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field CTIID GROUPID CTIIP CTIPORT CTISTATE Description Indicates the ID of the CTI. Indicates the ID of the CTI group. Indicates the IP address of the CTI. Indicates the port number of the CTI. Indicates the status of the CTI.
Related Commands
config add cti config delete cti
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-25
4 Display Commands
4.23 show device

Function
This command is used to view the information on all cards that are on the UAP.
Syntax
show device
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To view the information on all cards that are on the UAP, run the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show device DeviceNo DeviceType No Type 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 MPU MPU MPU MPU Card Card Card Card SubBox SubBox SubBox SubBox 0 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 ARG State OK -------- ---------- -- -------- ----MPUPOTS OK MPUAT0 OK MPUDSP OK DTU --ATU ----------FAULT --FAULT -----------
------- Matched record number : [12] ------
Related Commands
show card show mpu
4-26
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
4.24 show disconnectrecord

Function
The command is used to query the date and time of disconnecting elements and UAP2100.
Syntax
show disconnectrecord domainname <string>
Parameters
Parameter and Value domainname <string> Description Indicates the domain name. Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To query the disconnection date and time between the element with domain name ag232 and the UAP2100.
[%UAP2100]> show disconnectrecord domainname ag232 Total Data Time ----- ---- ---0
Related Commands
None.
4.25 show dspchannel

Function
This command is to query the DSP port based on the status.
Syntax
show dspchannel channel <0-63> channelstatus <sig send | sig recv | dtmf send | dtmfrecv | fsk send | fsk recv | mfc | conf | record | play | idle | busy> [number <1-64>]
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-27
4 Display Commands
Parameters
Parameter and Value channel <0-63> channelstatus <sig send | sig recv | dtmf send | dtmf recv | fsk send | fsk recv | mfc | conf | record | play | idle | busy> Description Indicates the number of DSP channel. Indicates the status of signal. The parameter has the following value options:

sig send: send signal tone sig recv: receive signal tone dtmf send: send DTMF dtmf recv: receive DTMF fsk send: send FSK fsk recv: receive FSK mfc: multiple frequency control conf: conference record: record voice play: play voice idle: idle busy: busy None
number <1-64>
Indicates the number of records.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To query the DSP port whose status is sig send, channel is 3, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show dspchannel list channel 3 channelstatus sig send PortNoInBoard PortState ------------- ---------
Related Commands
None.
4-28
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
4.26 show fp
Function
The command is used to view all FP configuration records.
Syntax
show fp
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
View all FP configuration records:
[%UAP2100]> show fp FP Information FPNo E1No SlotNo SlotE1No ---- -------- ------ -------10 0 1 0
Output
After running the command succeeds, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field FPNo E1No SlotNo SlotE1No Description Indicates the number of an FP. Indicates the number of the E1 port on the FP voice card. Indicates the slot number of the board used to connect the UAP to the CP. Indicates the number of the E1 port that connects the UAP to the FP.
Related Commands
config add fp config modify fp
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-29
4 Display Commands
config delete fp display fp by display fpchannel
4.27 show hostprefix

Function
This command is used to show the information about the analysis prefix of the calling number.
Syntax
show hostprefix [dn <prefix>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <prefix> Description Indicates an analysis prefix of the calling number Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
View the information about the analysis prefix of the calling number:
[%UAP2100]> show hostprefix HostPrefix Information DN PredealIndex Minlen Maxlen -- ------------ ------ -----20 5 4 4
Output
After running the command successfully, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field DN Description Indicates an analysis prefix of the calling number.
4-30
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
Field PredealIndex Minlen Maxlen
Description Indicates a called number change index. Indicates the minimum length of the number to which the prefix corresponds. Indicates the maximum length of the number to which the prefix corresponds.
Related Commands
config add hostprefix config modify hostprefix config delete hostprefix
4.28 show interface

Function
The command is used to view the working status of a service network port on the UAP2100.
Syntax
show interface
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
View the information about the working status of the service network port.
[%UAP2100(config)]#show interface Interface Status Link Auto 1 2 OK OK Duplex Speed RxStatus TxStatus 10M 100M No No No No
--------- ------ ---- ------- ------ ----- -------- -------Down Enabled Half Up Enabled Full
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-31
4 Display Commands
Output
After running the command succeeds, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field Interface Status Description Indicates the number of a service network port. Indicate the status of a service network port.

OK: indicates that the network port is normal. FAULT: indicates the network port is damaged.
Link
Indicates the connection status between a service network port and the corresponding network cable.

Up: indicates connection. Down: indicates disconnection.
Auto
Indicates the working mode of the network port.

Enable: Indicates that a service network port is in auto-negotiation mode. Disable: indicates that the service network port is in forcible mode.
Duplex
Indicates the communication mode of a service network port.

Full: indicates full-duplex. Half: indicates half-duplex.
Speed
Indicates the working rate of a service network port.

10M: indicates that the working rate of the service network port is 10 Mbit/s. 100M: indicates that the working rate of the service network port is 100 Mbit/s.
RxStatus
Indicates whether a service network port is receiving data.

Yes: indicates that the service network port is receiving data. No: indicates that the service network port is not receiving data.
TxStatus
Indicates whether a service network port is sending data.

Yes: indicates that the service network port is sending data. No: indicates that the service network port is not sending data.
Related Commands
config modify interface
4-32
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
4.29 show license

Function
The command is used to view the license information about this UAP.
Syntax
show license
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
View the license information about this UAP:
[%UAP2100(config)]#show license
Basic Infomation of License ESN of License:No ESN! Configuration Information of License Control Items Number of Users Number of Agents Number of Fax Channels Number of SIP Trunk(number of lines) Number of AT0 Trunk(number of lines) License of ACD Software License of CTI Software License of Local Generate Function License of Stacking Function License of Inner Media Resource License of Active/Standby Function License of Softswitch Access Function Current Usage of License Control Items Number of Users Number of Agents Number of Fax Channels Number of SIP Trunk(number of lines) : 5 : 1 : 0 : 1 : 100 : 10 : 30 : 120 : 8 : 480 : 40 : TRUE : TRUE : TRUE : TRUE : TRUE : TRUE : TRUE
Number of PRI Trunk(number of E1 ports)
Number of MFC/R2 Trunk(number of E1 ports): 8
Number of PRI Trunk(number of E1 ports)
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-33
4 Display Commands
Number of MFC/R2 Trunk(number of E1 ports): 0 Number of AT0 Trunk(number of lines) ==== Command executed success ! ==== : 16
Output
After running the command succeeds, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field Number of Users Number of Agents Number of Fax Channels Number of PRI Trunk (number of E1 ports) Number of SIP Trunk (number of lines) Number of MFC/R2 Trunk (number of E1 ports) Number of AT0 Trunk (number of lines) License of ACD Software License of CTI Software License of Local Generate Function License of Stacking Function License of Inner Media Resource License of Active/Standby Function License of Softswitch Access Function Description Indicates the number of allowed subscribers, including SIP subscribers and POTS subscribers. Indicates the number of allowed agents. Indicates the number of allowed fax channels. Indicates the number of allowed PRI digital trunks (number of E1 ports). Indicates the number of allowed SIP trunks (number of lines). Indicates the number of allowed MFC or R2 trunks (number of E1 ports). Indicates the number of allowed AT0 analog trunks (number of lines). Indicates the license of ACD software. Indicates the license of CTI software. Indicates the license of local regeneration function. Indicates the license of stacking function. Indicates the license of built-in media resource function. Indicates the license of active or standby function. Indicates the license of softswitch access function.
Related Commands
None.
4-34
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
4.30 show line report

Function
The command is used to query line signaling reporting adaptation data.
Format
show line report [id <0-254>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value id <0-254> Description Indicates a reporting adaptation index. Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
If you want to query all reporting adaptation data, do not set id.
Examples
To query all line signaling reporting adaptation data, run the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show line report Line Report LRPTIndex PhysicsEvent Para CallState LogicEvent --------- ------------ ---- --------- ---------0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 5 5 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 0 2 26 6 9 0 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 24 26 27 28 0 0 0 17 19 6 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 4 4 4 4 4
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-35
4 Display Commands
0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 13 13 13 13 13 3 7 11 11 11 11 11 15 15 30 0 2 8 10 12 0 6 0 12 14 24 28 2 10 4 32 15 27 27 27 0 17 6 30 4 4 4 15 27
Related Commands
config delete line report config add line report
4.31 show line send

Function
The command is used to query line signaling sending adaptation data.
Format
show line send [id <0-254>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value id <0-254> Description Indicates a sending adaptation index. Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
If you want to query all line signaling sending adaptation data, do not set id.
Examples
To query line signaling sending adaptation data, run the following command:
4-36
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)

[%UAP2100]> show line send Line Send LSNDIndex LogicEvent PhysicsEvent Para1 Para2 Para3 Para4 --------- ---------- ------------ ----- ----- ----- ----0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 4 6 14 15 17 19 27 30 32 33 0 4 15 17 27 30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 9 9 9 13 5 5 13 9 13 9 3 11 15 7 15 11 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4 Display Commands
Related Commands
config add line send config delete line send
4.32 show localcrbt

Function
The command is used to show whether the local CRBT gateway function is enabled.
Syntax
show localcrbt
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-37
4 Display Commands
Examples
View whether the local CRBT gateway function is enabled:
[%UAP2100]> show localcrbt LocalCRBT Information Enable: NO
Related Commands
config modify localcrbt
4.33 show localgw

Function
This command is used to view the information on the local gateway.
Syntax
show localgw
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To view the information on the local gateway, run the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show localgw GWName RasPort TechPrefix1 TechPrefix2 State ------ ------- ----------- ----------- --------gw 1200 gw2 Not Start
Related Commands
config localgw
4-38
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
4.34 show localvpchannel

Function
This command is used to show the number of local VP resources.
Syntax
show localvpchannel
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
View the number of local VP resources:
[%UAP2100]> show localvpchannel LocalVpChannelNum Information NAME NUMBER --------------- -----LOCAL_VPCHANNEL 30
Related Commands
config modify localvpchannel
4.35 show logserverinfo

Function
The command is used to view the information about the log server.
Syntax
show logserverinfo
Parameters
None.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-39
4 Display Commands
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
View the information about the log server:
[%UAP2100]> show logserverinfo LogServer Information LOGSERVERID LOGSERVERIP LOGSERVERPORT ----------- ----------- ------------1 1.1.1.1 6555
Output
After running the command succeeds, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field LOGSERVERID LOGSERVERIP LOGSERVERPORT Description Indicates the ID of the log server. Indicates the IP address of the log server. Indicates the port number of the log server.
Related Commands
config add logserver config delete logserver
4.36 show mfpstop overtime

Function
The command is used to query the timeout value of CNo.1 detecting multi-frequency pulse (MFP) backward stop.
Syntax
show mfpstop overtime
Parameters
None.
4-40
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To query the timeout value of CNo.1 detecting MFP backward stop, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show mfpstop overtime CNo1 MFPStop Overtime: 2s
Related Commands
config mfpstop
4.37 show mg
Function
The command is used to query the configurations of MGs.
Syntax
show mg [domainname <string>]
Parameters
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
Not to set the domainname to query the configurations of all MGs; Set the domainname to query the configurations of specified MGs.
Examples
To query the MG configuration of the domain ag232, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show mg domainname ag232
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-41
4 Display Commands
DomainName IP ag232

Protocol UserNum MGPort MGCPort RFC2833 CodeType 32 2427 2727 NO G711A
---------- ------------- -------- ------- ------ ------- ------- -------192.168.0.232 MGCP Pktmin/Pktmax GainControl SilenceSupression EchoCancel DigitMap HeartBeat ------------- ----------- ----------------- ---------- -------- --------20/20 0 ENABLE DISABLE NO YES HeartBeatPeriod CommState/ServiceState --------------- ---------------------120 FAULT/LOGOUT
Related Commands
config add mg config modify mg domainname config modify mg ip
4.38 show mpu

Function
This command is used to view the information about the MPU main board.
Syntax
show mpu
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
This command is used to view all the information on the MPU main board of the UAP2100, including the information on the POTS interface and the AT0 accompanying with the MPU main board.
Examples
To view the information about the MPU main board, run the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show mpu MPU Information Type State CPUUsage MemoryUsage ---- ----- -------- ----------MPU OK 8% 60%
POTS Information
4-42
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)

PortNo DomainName TermName Dn State RemarkInfo DirectDialTKC ------ ---------- -------- -- ----- ---------- ------------AT0 Information GlbNo BoardType TDMNo TS Office TrunkType Direction 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 MPUAT0 MPUAT0 MPUAT0 MPUAT0 MPUAT0 MPUAT0 MPUAT0 MPUAT0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 AT0 AT0 AT0 AT0 AT0 AT0 AT0 AT0
4 Display Commands
State SendNumberType
----- --------- ----- -- ------ --------- ----------- ----- -------------BiDirection FAULT N/A BiDirection FAULT N/A BiDirection FAULT N/A BiDirection FAULT N/A BiDirection FAULT N/A BiDirection FAULT N/A BiDirection FAULT N/A BiDirection FAULT N/A
Related Commands
show device show card show subscriber
4.39 show mrainfo

Function
This command is used to show the information about the MRA.
Syntax
show mrainfo
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
View the information about the MRA:
[%UAP2100]> show mrainfo MRA Information MRAID MRAIP MRAPORT
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-43
4 Display Commands
----- ------- ------1 1.1.1.1 6555
Output
After running the command successfully, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field MRAID MRAIP MRAPORT Description Indicates the ID of the MRA. Indicates the IP address of the MRA. Indicates the port number of the MRA.
Related Commands
config add mra config delete mra
4.40 show net alarm

Function
View network alarm records during the connection between the UAP and other devices. The alarm records show the reasons for the disconnection and reconnection between the UAP and other devices at a certain time.
Syntax
show net alarm [type < network | am | mra | cti | vp | vmm | cp | conference | fp | sipue | pra | sspserver >]
4-44
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
Parameters
Parameter and Value type < network | am | mra | cti | vp | vmm | cp | conference | fp | sipue | pra | sspserver > Description Types of devices connected with the UAP:

Default Value None
network: service network port am: AM management module mra: MRA cti: CTI-LINK vmm: VP channel occupation rate cp: CP station conference: conference site fp: FP station sipue: SIP users pra: PRA trunk link sspserver:SSP server
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
Pay attention to the following when you run the command:
If the type is specified, the network alarm record of the UAP and the device of this type is displayed. Otherwise, the network alarm record of the UAP and the device of all types is displayed. The system retains only 20 network alarm records of the UAP and each device. If the number of records exceeds 20, the earlier records are overwritten by the later records.
Examples
View the alarm information on the VP channel occupation rate on the VP station during the connection between the UAP and VP station:
[%UAP2100]> show net alarm type vmm Net alarm Information, just can provide latest 20 records. No Date&Time Description occupy VP resource ration:100 percent. occupy VP resource ration:50 percent. occupy VP resource ration:100 percent. --- ------------------- -------------------------------------3 2008-04-15 17:00:26 2 2008-04-15 16:58:25 1 2008-04-15 16:55:25
View the alarm information during the connection between the UAP and all other devices:
[%UAP2100]> show net alarm Net alarm Information.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-45
4 Display Commands
No Date&Time Description Network link restore Network link fault AM172.16.14.20 disconnect: heart beat VP station 0 lost connection occupy VP resource ration:100 percent. occupy VP resource ration:50 percent. occupy VP resource ration:100 percent. User 2803 lost connection User 2800 lost connection User 2801 lost connection User 2802 lost connection
--- ------------------- -------------------------------------11 2008-04-15 17:08:59 10 2008-04-15 17:08:53 9 2008-04-15 17:03:00 8 2008-04-15 17:02:28 7 2008-04-15 17:00:26 6 2008-04-15 16:58:25 5 2008-04-15 16:55:25 4 2008-04-15 17:08:11 3 2008-04-15 17:08:11 2 2008-04-15 17:08:10 1 2008-04-15 17:08:09
Output
After running the command successfully, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field No Date&Time Description Description Indicates the serial number of alarm information. Indicates the date and time of alarm information. Indicates the description of alarm information.
Related Commands
None.
4.41 show nfs

Function
The command is used to query the configuration information of the network file server (NFS).
Syntax
show nfs type <bmrs [slot <1-4>] | bill>
Parameters
Parameter and Value type <bmrs | bill> slot <1-4> Description Indicates the type of an NFS. Indicates the slot number of the built-in BMRS. Default Value None None
4-46
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
Query the configuration information of an NFS that is in slot 2 and is of the bmrs type.
[%UAP2100]> show nfs type bmrs slot 2 NFS Information NFSIP ------RemoteDir LocalDir UID d: GID STATUS -------- -------- ----- ----- -------65534 65533 Connect
10.16.11.121 share
Query the configuration information of the NFSs of the bill type on the local device.
[%UAP2100]> show nfs type bill NFS Information NFSIP ------RemoteDir LocalDir UID d: GID STATUS -------- -------- ----- ----- -------65534 65533 Connect
10.16.11.121 share
Output
After running the command successfully, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field NFSIP RemoteDir LocalDir UID GID STAT Description Indicates the IP address of an NFS. Indicates a remote shared directory. Indicates a local drive letter mapping a remote shared directory. Indicates a user ID. Indicates a group ID. Indicates the connection status of an NFS. The values are as follows:

Connect DisConnect Wait For Connect
Related Commands
config add nfs config modify nfs
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-47
4 Display Commands
config delete nfs
4.42 show nirc prefix

Function
The command is used to view the network call routing prefix that is currently configured.
Syntax
show nirc prefix
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
View the network call routing prefix that is currently configured:
[%UAP2100]> show nirc prefix NIRC prefix Information PREFIXID PREFIXDN -------- -------1 7552222
Output
After running the command succeeds, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field PREFIXID PREFIXDN Description Indicates the ID of the network call routing prefix. Indicates the network call routing prefix.
Related Commands
config add nirc prefix config delete nirc prefix
4-48
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
4.43 show numdeal

Function
The command is used to view the prefix added to the called number.
Syntax
show numdeal
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
View the prefix added to the called number:
[%UAP2100]> show numdeal Numdeal Information Dn NumADD -- -----80 600
Output
After running the command succeeds, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field Dn NumADD Description Indicates the called number prefix. Indicates the prefix added to the called number.
Related Commands
config add numdeal config delete numdeal
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-49
4 Display Commands
4.44 show office

Function
The command is used to query the details of office directions.
Format
show office [no <0-254>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <0-254> Description Indicates the number of a office direction. Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
To query the informaiton about all the office directions, do not set the value of no. To query the informaiton about specified office directions, set the value of no.
Examples
To query the information about office direction 2, run the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show office no 1 Office Office TKGType Priority Detail CodeType DPX OfficeSelectCode TimeIndex Charge ------ ------- -------- ------ -------- --- ---------------- --------- -----10 PeerDeviceName -------------0 10
Prefix Prefix ------
Related Commands
config add office config delete office
4-50
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
config modify office
4.45 show office selectcode

Function
The command is used to query an office direction selection code.
Format
show office selectcode no <0-254>
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <0-254> Description Indicates the office direction selection code. Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
You can run this command to query the attribute of a configured office direction selection code. Then the following information is displayed:

Strategy of the office direction selection code Failure index All the office directions of the selection code
Examples
To query office direction selection code 1, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]> show office selectcode no 1 OfficeSelectCode OfficeSelectCode SelectType RouteFailDeal Send2ndDialTone ---------------- ---------- ------------1 Prefix Prefix -----None No
Office Information Office -----5 7 TKGType -------------------------------------PRA[BIDIRECTION] SIP ChargeValue ----------15 150
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-51
4 Display Commands
6 PRA[BIDIRECTION]\SIP 65535
Related Commands
config add office selectcode config modify office selectcode
4.46 show peercomponent

Function
The command is used to query the information on peer components.
Syntax
show peercomponent [domainname <string>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value domainname <string> Description Indicates the domain name of a peer component Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
Not to set the domainname to query the information on all peer components; set the domainname to query the information on specified peer components.
Examples
To query the information on the peer component whose domain name is ss152, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show peercomponent domainname ss152 DomainName IPAddress ss152 PeerTKCNum SIPTKCNum SIPOffice SIPServiceStatus ---------------- ------------- ---------- --------- --------- ---------------192.168.0.152 256 H323TKCNum H323Office H323ServiceStatus HeartBeat HeartBeatPeriod CommState ---------- ---------- ----------------- --------- --------------- --------------NO 120 ---
4-52
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
Related Commands
config add peercomponent config delete peercomponent
4.47 show potscp dtmf send

Function
This command is used to view the sending mode of the DTMF.
Syntax
show potscp dtmf send
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To view the sending mode of the DTMF, run the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show potscp dtmf send Potscp dtmf send mode is cdsp!
Related Commands
config potscp dtmf send mode
4.48 show pra huawei

Function
The command is used to query the setting of software parameter switch.
Syntax
show pra huawei
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-53
4 Display Commands
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To query the setting of software parameter switch, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show pra huawei PRA HUAWEI : ON
Related Commands
config pra huawei
4.49 show pra pseudo alerting mode

Function
This command is used to query the setting of the PRA pseudo alerting mode switch.
Syntax
show pra pseudo alerting mode
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To query the setting of the PRA pseudo alerting mode switch, run the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show pra pseudo alerting mode PRA Pseudo Alerting Mode is Enable
4-54
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
Related Commands
config pra pseudo alerting
4.50 show pralink

Function
The command is used to query the information on PRA links.
Syntax
show pralink [linkno <0-255>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value linkno <0-255> Description Indicates the number of a pra link. Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
Not to set the linkno to query the information on all PRA links; set the linkno to query the information on specified PRA links.
Examples
To query the information on the PRA link whose number is 200, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show pralink linkno 200 LinkNo Slot Trunk E1No WGsn Position TS State ------ ---- ----- ---- ---- -------- -- ----200 2 1 2 20 user 16 FAULT
Related Commands
config add pralink config delete pralink
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-55
4 Display Commands
4.51 show predeal

Function
The command is used to query the information on predeal index.
Syntax
show predeal [index <0-1023>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value index <0-1023> Description Indicates the index number of predeal. Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
Not to set the index to query the information on all indexes; set the index to query the information on specified indexes.
Examples
To query the information on the index 2, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show predeal index 2 Predeal ChangeType ChangePos ChangeLen NewDn NumberType Prefix ------- ---------- --------- --------- ----- ---------- -----2 DELETE 0 1 NONE -
Related Commands
config add predeal config delete predeal
4.52 show prefix

Function
The command is used to query the information about prefixes.
Format
show prefix [dn <string>]
4-56
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> Description Indicates the prefix. Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
To query the information about all prefixes, do not set the value of dn. To query the information about specified prefixes, set the value of dn.
Examples
To query the information about the prefix whose dn is set to 112, run the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show prefix dn 112 Prefix Prefix CallCategory CallAttribute CustomAttribute ChargeIndex SelectOfficeCode ------ ------------ ------------- --------------- ----------- ---------------112 basic inter null -----
MinLen MaxLen UseLongCLI ------ ------ ---------1 24 NO CLDPredeal Information CLDPredeal CLDIndex ChangeType ChangePos ChangeLen NewDn ---------- -------- ---------- --------- --------- ----YES 2 DELETE 0 1 -
Related Commands
config add prefix dn callcategory config modify prefix dn callcategory config modify prefix config delete prefix
4.53 show prefix callcategory

Function
The command is used to the prefix of a service type.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-57
4 Display Commands
Format
show prefix callcategory <basic | new | in | sin | vu | ivr| card | intess >
Parameters
Parameter and Value callcategory < basic | new | in | sin | vu | ivr | card | intess> Description Indicates the type of a service. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None
basic: basic service new: supplementary service in: intelligent service sin: special access code vu: virtual attendant ivr: card service virtual attendant card: card service intess: call center service
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To query the prefix of the new service, run the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show prefix callcategory new Prefix Prefix CallAttribute *11* *11# *125 *33* *34* *35* *36* *37* *38* *39* *40* *41* *50# *51* apickupspecial apickupingroup querydn confkick conflistenonly conftalkonly confisolate confattend confterminate conftrigger scfb scfnr sabsentuser sabbrdial OfficeSelectCode ------ ----------------- ------
4-58
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)

*52* *53# *54* *55* *56# *57* *58# *59# *61* *64# *65* *77* *78# *79* *80* *89* **** ** #22* #34* #40* #40# #41* #41# #50# #51* #51# #52# #53# #54* #55# #56# #57* #57# #58# #59# #61* #64# #65# #77* #77# #78# #79* shotlined scallsave scalllimit swakeupcall sdds scfu scallwait scallback shotlinei telephonistup telephonistreg ssecretarysrv ssecretarystation recordtone operatorinsert modifypwd confattend aabbrdial cnsall conflistentalk rccfb ccfb rccfnr ccfnr cabsentuser cabbrdial cabbrdialall chotlined ccallsave ccalllimit cwakeupcall cdds rccfu ccfu ccallwait ccallback chotlinei telephonistdown telephonistquit csecretarysrv csecretarysrv csecretarystation playtone
4 Display Commands
Related Commands
config add prefix dn callcategory config modify prefix config delete prefix
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-59
4 Display Commands
4.54 show protocol

Function
The command is used to query the protocol information about corresponding office directions.
Format
show protocol <at0 | cassignal | pra | sip | h323> [officeno <0-254>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value protocol <at0 | cassignal | pra | sip | h323 > Description Indicates the type of a protocol. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None
AT0 CAS PRA SIP H.323 None
officeno <0-254>
Indicates the number of a office direction.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To query the H.323 protocol information about office direction 3, run the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show protocol h323 officeno 3 Office IPAddress DomainName SgnPort FastStart MaxCallNum DefaultCLDNum1 ------ --------- ---------- ------- --------- ---------- -------------3 1.1.1.4 9500nax 2000 Disable 24 None DefaultCLDNum2 DeviceType OTMN -------------- ----------- ------None OterhDevice refused
To query the PRA protocol information about the office direction 2, run the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show protocol pra officeno 2 Office SelectLineMode DefaultCLDNum1 DefaultCLDNum2 Slot DefaultIECHIType
4-60
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
------ -------------- -------------- -------------- -------- ---------------2 POLL Card[4] NULL DeviceType OTMN ----------- ------OtherDevice refused
Related Commands
config protocol cassignal config protocol h323 config protocol pra
4.55 show pstndeal

Function
This command is used to show the information about the special direct-dialing number.
Syntax
show pstndeal [dn <string>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> Description Indicates a special direct-dialing number. Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
View the information about the special direct-dialing number:
[%UAP2100]> show pstndeal PSTNDeal Information DN PredealIndex ---- -----------1003 5
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-61
4 Display Commands
Output
After running the command successfully, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field DN PredealIndex Description Indicates a special direct-dialing number. Indicates a called number change index.
Related Commands
config add pstndeal config delete pstndeal
4.56 show ringrelate

Function
The command is used to query the index information on protocol ring types.
Syntax
show ringrelate [no <0-255>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <0-255> Description Indicates the index number of a ring type. Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
Not to set the no to query the index information on all protocol ring types; set the no view the index information on specified protocol ring types.
Examples
To query the index information on the protocol ring type 3, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show ringrelate no 3 Index Protocol Normal Centrex Silent First FSK Stop User1 ----- -------- ------- ----------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
4-62
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)

3 User2 MGCP User3 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN
4 Display Commands
UNKNOWN UNKNOWN UNKNOWN UNKNOWN UNKNOWN
------- ------UNKNOWN UNKNOWN
Related Commands
config add ringrelate config modify ringrelate config delete ringrelate
4.57 show ringservice

Function
The command is used to query the ring information like ring type and ring number.
Syntax
show ringservice [dn <string>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> Description Indicates the number of a subscriber. Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
Not to set the dn to query the ring information on all subscribers; Set the dn to query the ring information on specified subscribers.
Examples
To query the ring information on the subscriber whose number is 330001, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show ringservice dn 330001 Dn RingService Num1 Num2 Num3 Num4 Num5 Num6 Num7 Num8 Num9 Num10 ------ ----------- ------ ------ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----330001 SERIAL 330010 330011 -
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-63
4 Display Commands
Related Commands
config add ringservice config modify ringservice config delete ringservice
4.58 show ringtype

Function
The command is used to query the index information on different ring types.
Syntax
show ringtype [no <0-254>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value no <0-254> Description Indicates the index number. Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
Not to set the no to query the index information on all ring types; set the no view the index information on specified ring types.
Examples
To query the index information on ring type whose index number is 2, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show ringtype no 2 Index Centrex ----- --------2 Inter Local Local_Toll DDD IDD CallerNumberSend -------- -------- ---------- -------- -------- ----------------
Centrex _R Normal_R Normal_R Centrex_ R Normal_R Normal_R Outband
Related Commands
config add ringtype config modify ringtype config delete ringtype
4-64
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
4.59 show running time

Function
The command is used to query the passed run time of the system.
Syntax
show running time
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To query the run time of the system, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show running time System running time: 23 Hours 52 Minutes
Related Commands
4.60 show seatno

Function
The command is used to view the seat number of the UAP. You can specify one or more UAPs.
Syntax
show seatno mid <1-253> [number <1-8>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value mid <1-253> Description Indicates the module IDs of the UAP where the seat resides. Default Value None
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-65
4 Display Commands
Parameter and Value number <1-8>
Description Indicates the seats that module mid through module mid + number configure.
Default Value None
Modes
View
Usage Guidelines
The command without the parameter number displays the seat numbers that module mid configures. The command with the parameter number displays the seat numbers that module mid through module mid + number configure.
Examples
Query the seat numbers of the module with the ID of 56:
[%UAP2100]> show seatno mid 56 Seat Information Module ID SeatNo Local Module --------- ------ -----------[ 56] [ 56] [ 56] [ 56] [ 56] 2000 2001 5000 5001 5002 yes yes yes yes yes
Output
After running the command succeeds, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field Module ID SeatNo Local Module Description Indicates the module ID of the UAP where the seat resides. Indicates the seat number. Indicates whether the seat is a local one.
Related Commands
config add localseat config delete localseat
4-66
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
4.61 show sip parameter

Function
The command is used to query the parameters involved in SIP.
Syntax
show sip parameter
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To query the parameters involved in SIP, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show sip parameter T4 SrvPort MinRegExpires MaxRegExpires MinSessionInterval -- ------- ------------- ------------- -----------------50 5060 5 60 90 UseSessionTimer --------------No
Related Commands
config modify sip parameter
4.62 show siplocalgenerate

Function
This command is used to show the prefix to which the SIP trunk with the enabled function of simple local regeneration corresponds.
Syntax
show siplocalgenerate
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-67
4 Display Commands
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To query the prefix to which the SIP trunk with the enabled function of simple local regeneration corresponds:
[%UAP2100]> show siplocalgenerate SIPLOCALGENERATE Information Prefixdn -------1
Output
Field Prefixdn Description Indicates the prefix to which the SIP trunk corresponds.
Related Commands
config siplocalgenerate enable config siplocalgenerate disable
4.63 show sipselect

Function
The command is used to view SIP trunk polling.
Syntax
show sipselect [prefix1 <string>]
4-68
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
Parameters
Parameter and Value prefix1 <string> Description Indicates SIP trunk prefix 1 that is configured in SIP trunk polling. Default Value None
Modes
View
Usage Guidelines
The command with no parameter displays all SIP trunks for polling. The command with the parameter prefix1 displays polling of the SIP trunk with prefix 1.
Examples
View all SIP trunk polling:
[%UAP2100]> show sipselect SIPSELECT Information Prefix Method --------------------------------- -----[1] 081 [2] 082 [3] 083 [16] 084 POLL [1] 085 [2] 087 POLL
Output
After running the command succeeds, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field Prefix Method Description Indicates the SIP trunk prefix for polling. Indicates the polling algorithm type. Only one type of algorithm is supported at present.
Related Commands
config add sipselect config delete sipselect
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-69
4 Display Commands
4.64 show sipue

Function
The command is used to query the information on the SIP UE.
Syntax
show sipue [eid <string>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value eid <string> Description Indicates the identity of the UE. Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
To query the information on all SIP UEs, do not set eid. To query the information on specified SIG UEs, set eid.
Examples
To query the information on the SIP UE whose ID is 1234, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show sipue eid 1234 EID AuthorizationType IP Password RFC2833 CodeType 1234 NoAuth NO Status ---- ----------------- -- -------- ------- --------------------- -----------G711A/G711U/G729/G723 FAULT/LOGOUT
Related Commands
config add sipue config delete sipue config modify sipue
4.65 show sptfile relation

Function
The command is used to query the mapping relations between the SPT file numbers specified on the centralized configuration console and the numbers of the voice playing files in voice.zip on the UAP2100.
4-70
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
Syntax
show sptfile relation
Parameters
None
Modes
View
Usage Guidelines
None
Examples
Query the mapping relations between the SPT file numbers specified on the centralized configuration console and the numbers of the SPT files in voice.zip on the UAP2100.
[%UAP2100]> show sptfile relation Spt File Relation! SptFile Local Voice File ------- ---------------18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190
Output
After running the command successfully, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field SptFile Local Voice File Description Indicates an SPT file number specified on the centralized configuration console. Indicates the number of a voice playing file in voice.zip.
Related Commands
config modify sptfile config delete batch sptfile
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-71
4 Display Commands
4.66 show staticgw

Function
The command is used to query the configurations of static gateways.
Syntax
show staticgw
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To query the configurations of static gateways, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show staticgw Index GwName SignalIP 0 gw SignalPort TechPrefix1 TechPrefix2 12345 ----- ------ ----------- ---------- ----------- ----------192.169.1.1 1500
Related Commands
config add staticgw config modify staticgw config delete staticgw
4.67 show statpara

Function
The command is used to query the configuration information of temporary CDR files on the NFS.
Syntax
show statpara
4-72
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
Parameters
None
Modes
View
Usage Guidelines
None
Examples
Query the configuration information of temporary CDR files on the NFS.
[%UAP2100]> show statpara StatPara Information StatLen(MB) ----------2 StatTime(s) -------180
Output
After running the command successfully, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field StatLen Description Indicates the size of the cache for storing temporary CDR files on the NFS. Unit: MB StatTime Indicates the duration for storing a temporary CDR file on the NFS. Unit: second
Related Commands
config modify statpara
4.68 show statswitch

Function
The command is used to check whether the traffic statistics function of the UAP2100 trunk is enabled.
Syntax
show statswitch
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-73
4 Display Commands
Parameters
None
Modes
View
Usage Guidelines
None
Examples
Check whether the traffic statistics function of the UAP2100 trunk is enabled.
%UAP2100]> show statswitch StatSwitch Information Enable:YES
Output
After running the command successfully, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field Enable Description Indicates the status of the traffic statistics function of the UAP2100 trunk. The values are as follows:

YES: indicates that the function is enabled. NO: indicates that the function is disabled.
Related Commands
config modify statswitch
4.69 show subbox

Function
This command is used to view the information about the subscriber box.
Syntax
show subbox [no <1-4>]
4-74
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
Parameters
Parameter and Value no<1-4> Description Indicates the number of the subscriber box. Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
You can view the information about a subscriber box whose number is specified. If the number of the subscriber box is not specified, you can view the information about all subscriber boxes.
Examples
To view the information about the subscriber box whose number is 1, run the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show subbox no 1 Subbox Information No Type State Version -- ------ ----- ------1 SUBBOX FAULT -POTS Information PortNo DomainName TermName Dn 0 1 2 pots pots pots POTS40 POTS41 POTS42 State RemarkInfo DirectDialTKC ------ ---------- -------- ---- ----- ---------- ------------2000 FAULT 2001 FAULT 2002 FAULT
To view the information about all subscriber boxes, run the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show subbox No Type State Version -- ------ ----- ------1 SUBBOX FAULT -2 SUBBOX FAULT -------- Matched record number : [2] -------
Related Commands
None.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-75
4 Display Commands
4.70 show subscriber

Function
The command is used to query the information on subscribers.
Syntax
show subscriber [dn <string>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> Description Indicates the number of a subscriber. Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
Set the parameter dn to query the details of specified subscribers; not to set the dn to query the information on all subscribers.
Examples
To query the information on all subscribers, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show subscriber GlobalPortNo DomainName TermName Dn 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 199 test test test test test test test test test test test2 gg0 gg1 gg2 gg3 gg4 gg5 gg6 gg7 gg8 gg9 term State RemarkInfo DirectDialTKC ------------ ---------- -------- ---- ----- ---------- ------------1001 FAULT 1002 FAULT 1003 FAULT 1004 FAULT 1005 FAULT 1006 FAULT 1007 FAULT 1008 FAULT 1009 FAULT 1010 FAULT 3000 FAULT
To query the information on the subscriber whose number is 3000, carry out the following information:
[%UAP2100]> show subscriber dn 3000 Dn DomainName TermName UserType State term NORMAL FAULT Source UserState FaxMode 0 NORMAL BYPASS ---- ---------- -------- -------- ---------- ------ --------- ------3000 test2
4-76
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
RemarkInfo DirectDialTKC RingTypeIndex CentrexGroup OutgoingRight ---------- ------------- ------------- ------------ ------------IncomingRight Telephonist UserName INTER/LOCAL
------------------- ----------- -------INTER/LOCAL/DDD/IDD No
Related Commands
config add subscriber domainname config delete subscriber dn config delete subscriber domainname
4.71 show subscriber by callsourceno

Function
The command is used to query the user with the specified call source.
Syntax
show subscriber by callsourceno <0-255>
Parameters
Parameter and Value callsourceno <0-255> Description Indicates a call source number. Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To query the user with the specified call source, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show subscriber by callsourceno 1 Dn GlobalPortNo State FAULT Source 1 ---- ------------ ---------- -----5001 1045
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-77
4 Display Commands
Related Commands
config modify subscriber dn
4.72 show subscriber by pbxgroupno

Function
The command is used to query the users in a specified PBX group.
Syntax
show subscriber by pbxgroupno <0-49>
Parameters
Parameter and Value pbxgroupno <0-49> Description Indicates the number of a PBX group. Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To query the users in a specified PBX group, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show subscriber by pbxgroupno 1 Dn GlobalPortNo State FAULT PBXGroupNo NumType 1 PBXIND ---- ------------ ---------- ---------- ------5001 1045
Related Commands
4.73 show subscriber dn type

Function
The command is used to query various information on the subscriber.
4-78
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
Syntax
show subscriber dn <string> type <basic | bill | newservice | all>
Parameters
Parameter and Value dn <string> type <basic | bill | newservice | all> Description Indicates the number of a subscriber. The parameter has the following value options:

basic: basic information bill: bill information newservice: supplementary service information all: all information
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
The subscriber number must exist.
Examples
To query the basic information on the subscriber whose number is 3000, carry out the following information:
[%UAP2100]> show subscriber dn 3000 type basic Dn DomainName UserName UserType State agw0 NORMAL FAULT Source UserState FaxMode 0 NORMAL BYPASS ---- ---------- -------- -------- ---------- ------ --------- ------3000 ag232 RemarkInfo DirectDialTKC RingTypeIndex CentrexGroup OutgoingRight ---------- ------------- ------------- ------------ ------------IncomingRight ------------------INTER/LOCAL/DDD/IDD INTER/LOCAL
Related Commands
config add mg config add subscriber domainname
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-79
4 Display Commands
4.74 show subscriber domainname

Function
The command is used to query the information on all subscribers of a MG.
Syntax
show subscriber domainname <string>
Parameters
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To query the information on all subscribers the MG whose domain name is ag232, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show subscriber domainname ag232 PortNo DomainName TermName Dn 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ag232 ag232 ag232 ag232 ag232 ag232 ag232 ag232 ag232 ag232 ag232 ag232 ag232 agw0 agw1 agw2 agw3 agw4 agw5 agw6 agw7 agw8 agw9 agw10 agw11 agw12 State RemarkInfo DirectDialTKC ------ ---------- -------- ---- ----- ---------- ------------3000 FAULT 3001 FAULT 3002 FAULT 3003 FAULT 3004 FAULT 3005 FAULT 3006 FAULT 3007 FAULT 3008 FAULT 3009 FAULT 3010 FAULT 3011 FAULT 3012 FAULT
Related Commands
config add subscriber domainname
4-80
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
4.75 show subscriber filter

Function
The command is used to query subscribers according to specific conditions, and the conditions include the subscriber type, the new service type, the outgoing right and the incoming right.
Syntax
show subscriber filter [usertype <normal | prior | operator>] [outgoingrights <inter&local&ddd&idd>] [incomingrights <inter&local&ddd&idd>] [newservicerights <dds & cfu & clir & cfb & clip & cfnr & threeparty & conf & hotline & busycallback & wakeupcall & busycallsave & calllimit & secretaryservice & callwaiting & secretarystation & remoteset & absentuser & abbreviativedial & cancelallnewservices & pickupingroup & hookingtransfer & pickupspecial & ringservice & disppstndn & faxnegotiate & operatordisconnect & tonesupervision & operatorinsert & operatoroverstep & superrightsuser & supervisionoverstep & cnam & cfo>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value usertype <normal | prior | operator> Description Indicates the type of a user. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None
normal: normal subscriber prior: preferential subscriber operator: attendant
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-81
4 Display Commands
Parameter and Value newservicerights <dds & cfu & clir & cfb & clip & cfnr & threeparty & conf & hotline & busycallback & wakeupcall & busycallsave & calllimit & secretaryservice & callwaiting & secretarystation & remoteset & absentuser & abbreviativedial & cancelallnewservices & pickupingroup & hookingtransfer & pickupspecial & ringservice & disppstndn & faxnegotiate & operatordisconnect & tonesupervision & operatorinsert & operatoroverstep & superrightsuser & supervisionoverstep & cnam & cfo>
Description Indicates the type of a new service. The values are as follows:

Default Value None
dds: avoiding disturbance cfu: forwarding unconditionally clir: calling party display limit cfb: call forwarding when busy clip: displaying calling number threeparty::the three-party service cfnr: call forwarding when lack response conf: phone conference hotline: hotline service busycallback: calling back when busy wakeupcall: wakeup service busycallsave: saving call when busy calllimit: call limitation secretaryservice: secretary service callwaiting: call waiting secretarystation: secretary station remoteset:the remote setting service absentuser: absent user abbreviativedial: dialing abbreviated number cancelallnewservices: canceling all new services pickupingroup:the co-group pickup service hookingtransfer: hooking transfer pickupspecial: the designated pickup service ringservice: the ringing service faxnegotiate: the fax negotiation service operatordisconnect: the operator forced release service tonesupervision: the interception service operatorinsert: the operator forced insertion service operatoroverstep: the operator override right service superrightsuser: the super right user service supervisionoverstep: listening service cnam: calling name presentation cfo: call forwarding on offline
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)

4-82
4 Display Commands
Parameter and Value outgoingrights <inter&local&ddd&idd>
Description Indicates an outgoing right. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None
inter: current office local: local call ddd: domestic toll call idd: international toll call None
incomingrights <inter&local&ddd&idd>
Indicates an incoming right. The parameter has the following value options:

inter: current office local: local call ddd: domestic toll call idd: international toll call
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To query the information on the subscribers whose type is operator, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show subscriber filter usertype operator Dn DomainName UserName State agw101 FAULT RemarkInfo ---- ---------- -------- ---------- ---------5001 ag232
Related Commands
4.76 show subscriber pots

Function
This command is used to view the information about POTS subscribers.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-83
4 Display Commands
Syntax
show subscriber pots
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To view the information about POTS subscribers, run the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show subscriber pots PortNo DomainName TermName Dn 3 4 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots POTS3 POTS4 POTS40 POTS41 POTS42 POTS43 POTS44 POTS45 POTS46 POTS47 POTS48 POTS49 POTS50 POTS51 POTS52 POTS53 POTS54 POTS55 POTS56 POTS57 POTS58 POTS59 POTS60 POTS61 POTS62 POTS63 POTS64 POTS65 POTS66 POTS67 POTS68 POTS69 State RemarkInfo DirectDialTKC ------ ---------- -------- ---- -------- ---------- ------------6000 IDLE 6001 IDLE 8000 FAULT 8001 FAULT 8002 FAULT 8003 FAULT 8004 FAULT 8005 FAULT 8006 FAULT 8007 FAULT 8008 FAULT 8009 FAULT 8010 FAULT 8011 FAULT 8012 FAULT 8013 FAULT 8014 FAULT 8015 FAULT 8016 FAULT 8017 FAULT 8018 FAULT 8019 FAULT 8020 FAULT 8021 FAULT 8022 FAULT 8023 FAULT 8024 FAULT 8025 FAULT 8026 FAULT 8027 FAULT 8028 FAULT 8029 FAULT
4-84
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)

70 71 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots POTS70 POTS71 POTS77 POTS78 POTS79 POTS80 POTS81 POTS82 POTS83 POTS84 POTS85 POTS86 8030 FAULT 8031 FAULT 8050 FAULT 8051 FAULT 8052 FAULT 8053 FAULT 8054 FAULT 8055 FAULT 8056 FAULT 8057 FAULT 8058 FAULT 8059 FAULT -
4 Display Commands
Related Commands
None.
4.77 show subscriber state

Function
The command is used to query users according to different subscriber states.
Syntax
show subscriber state <idle | busy | block | fault | maintain | test | offline | locked> [mgname <string>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value state <idle | busy | block | fault | maintain | test | offline | locked> Description Indicates the state of a subscriber. The parameter has the following value options:

Default Value None
idle busy block fault maintain test offline locked None
mgname <string>
Indicates the domain name of MG.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-85
4 Display Commands
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines

Set the mgname to query the information on the subscribers of specified state and MG. Not to set the mgname to query the information on all subscribers of specified state.
Examples
To query the subscribers whose state is idle in the MG ag232, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show subscriber state idle mgname ag232 Dn DomainName UserName State agw101 IDLE CallSource RemarkInfo 1 ---- ---------- -------- --------- ---------- ---------5001 ag232
Related Commands
block subscriber dn block subscriber domainname unblock subscriber dn unblock subscriber domainname
4.78 show subscriber subbox

Function
This command is used to view the information about all subscribers that are under a certain subscriber box.
Syntax
show subscriber subbox no<1-4>
Parameters
Parameter and Value no<1-4> Description Indicates the number of a subscriber box. Default Value None
Modes
View.
4-86
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To view the information about all subscribers under No.1 subscriber box, run the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show subscriber subbox no 1 PortNo DomainName TermName Dn 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots pots POTS40 POTS41 POTS42 POTS43 POTS44 POTS45 POTS46 POTS47 POTS48 POTS49 POTS50 POTS51 POTS52 POTS53 POTS54 POTS55 POTS56 POTS57 POTS58 POTS59 POTS60 POTS61 POTS62 POTS63 POTS64 POTS65 POTS66 POTS67 POTS68 POTS69 POTS70 POTS71 State RemarkInfo DirectDialTKC ------ ---------- -------- ---- ----- ---------- ------------8000 FAULT 8001 FAULT 8002 FAULT 8003 FAULT 8004 FAULT 8005 FAULT 8006 FAULT 8007 FAULT 8008 FAULT 8009 FAULT 8010 FAULT 8011 FAULT 8012 FAULT 8013 FAULT 8014 FAULT 8015 FAULT 8016 FAULT 8017 FAULT 8018 FAULT 8019 FAULT 8020 FAULT 8021 FAULT 8022 FAULT 8023 FAULT 8024 FAULT 8025 FAULT 8026 FAULT 8027 FAULT 8028 FAULT 8029 FAULT 8030 FAULT 8031 FAULT
Related Commands
None.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-87
4 Display Commands
4.79 show system clocksource information

Function
The command is used to query the system TDM clock source.
Syntax
show system clocksource information
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
show system clocksource information:
[%UAP2100]> show system clocksource information Clocksource is not config yet! System Clock Source: MCU [Oscillator]
Related Commands
config system clocksource primaryslot
4.80 show system information

Function
The command is used to query the system information.
Syntax
Parameters
None.
4-88
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to query the following information:

Device type Domain name IP address MAC address Gateway IP address Subnet mask Load server IP address Encoding and decoding type supported by the system
Examples
To query the system information, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show system information Device Type: UAP2100 DomainName: SS IP Address: 172.20.200.221 MAC Address: 00-05-3b-8c-01-01 GateWay IP Address: 0.0.0.0 SubMask: 255.255.0.0 Host IP Address: 172.20.200.203 CTISERVER IP Address: 172.20.200.203 Voice Code And Decode Type: G711A/G711Mu/G729/G723 Running Time: 151 Hours 28 Minutes Current Time: Date:2007-03-08 Time:17:47:14 System Mid: 1
Related Commands
config system domainname config system gateway config system hostip config system ip
4.81 show system media consult switch

Function
The command is used to query the state of media consult switch.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-89
4 Display Commands
Syntax
show system media consult switch
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To query the state of media consult switch, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show system media consult switch Media consult switch is [ ON ]
Related Commands
config system media consult
4.82 show system time

Function
The command is used to query current time of the system.
Syntax
show system time
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
Use the command to query current time of the system. The time is displayed in the format of year, month, day, hour, minute, second.
4-90
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
Examples
To query current time of the system, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show system time Date:2007-02-11 Time:22:44:23
Related Commands
config system date config system time
4.83 show tdmintesstimer

Function
The command is used to display the delay after the TDM calling party dials the call center number.
Syntax
show tdmintesstimer
Parameters
None
Modes
View
Usage Guidelines
By using this command, you can obtain the digit-collecting delay when the TDM calls the INTESS service.
Examples
View the delay when the TDM calls the INTESS service:
[%UAP2100]> show tdmintesstimer TDM INTESS LATENCY Tdmintesstimer(S): 3
Output
After running the command succeeds, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-91
4 Display Commands
Field Tdmintesstimer(S)
Description Indicates the delay when the TDM calls the INTESS service:
Related Commands
config modify tdmintesstimer
4.84 show tgld

Function
The command is used to query the configuration of tgld.
Syntax
show tgld callsourceno <0-255> officeno <0-254> protocol <at0bidirection | cassignalbidirection | cassignaloutgoing | pra | sip | h323> prefix <string>
Parameters
Parameter and Value callsourceno <0-255> officeno <0-254> protocol <at0bidirection | cassignalbidirection | cassignaloutgoing | pra | sip | h323 Description Indicates the call source number. Indicates the office direction number. Indicates an adopted protocols. The parameter has the following value options:

at0bidirection: AT0 outgoing cassignalbidirection: channel associated signaling outgoing and incoming cassignaloutgoing: channel associated signaling outgoing pra: PRA sip: SIP h323: H.323 None

prefix <string>
Indicates the prefix.
Modes
View.
4-92
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To query the information on the tgld that accords with the following conditions:

Call source number is 1. Office direction number is 2. PRA protocol is adopted. Prefix is 123.
carry out the following command:

[%UAP2100]> show tgld callsourceno 1 officeno 2 protocol pra prefix 123 CallSourceNo OfficeNo Prefix PeerRingBack CLIPreDeal CLIIndex CldPreDeal ------------ -------- ------ ------------ ---------- -------- ---------1 2 123 NO NO NULL NO CldIndex Protocol -------- -------NULL PRA
Related Commands
config delete tgld config add tgld config modify tgld
4.85 show tkc slot

Function
This command is used to view the information about the digital trunk circuit in the E1 card.
Syntax
show tkc slot <1-4> [tkcno <list(0-127)>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value slot <1-4> tkcno <list(0-127) Description Indicates the slot number. Indicates the number of the trunk circuit. Default Value None None
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-93
4 Display Commands
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
If you choose not to enter a value for tkcno, this indicates that you can view the information about the 128 circuit.
Examples
In slot 1, to view the information about all digital trunk circuits of the card, run the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show tkc slot 1 GlbNo BoardType TDMNo TS Office TrunkType Direction 512 513 DTU 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 State SendNumberType ----- --------- ----- -- ------ --------- ----------- --------- --------------
CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL
CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL
BiDirection UNINSTALL MFC BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC 514
10 0 11 0 12 0 13 0 14 0 15 0 16 0 17 0 18 0 19 0 20 0 21 0 22 0 23 0 24 0 25 0 26 0 27 0 28 0 29 0 30 0 31 0 32 0 33 0 34 0 35 0 36 0 37 0
BiDirection UNINSTALL MFC
4-94
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)

550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU DTU 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 38 0 39 0 40 0 41 0 42 0 43 0 44 0 45 0 46 0 47 0 48 0 49 0 50 0 51 0 52 0 53 0 54 0 55 0 56 0 57 0 58 0 59 0 60 0 61 0 62 0 63 0 CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE BiDirection IDLE
4 Display Commands
MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC
In slot 1, to view the information about No.1 to No.5 digital trunk circuits of the card, run the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show tkc slot 1 tkcno 1-5 TSNo GlobeTS Office TrunkType 1 2 3 4 5 513 514 515 516 517 0 0 0 0 0 State ---- ------- ------ ---------------- ----CASSIGNAL[BIDIRECTION] IDLE CASSIGNAL[BIDIRECTION] IDLE CASSIGNAL[BIDIRECTION] IDLE CASSIGNAL[BIDIRECTION] IDLE CASSIGNAL[BIDIRECTION] IDLE
Related Commands
None.
4.86 show tkc slot portinboard

Function
This command is used to view the circuit information.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-95
4 Display Commands
Syntax
show tkc slot <1-4> portinboard <0-3> [number <1-4>] [ts <0-31>]
Parameters
Parameter and Value slot <1-4> portinboard <0-3> number <1-4> ts <0-31> Description Indicates the slot number. Indicates the number of the E1 port. Indicates the amount of the circuits. Indicates the timeslot. Default Value None None None None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
This command is used to view the circuit status of boards and circuit parameters. You can view all the circuit status of boards by entering the slot number and E1 port number.
Examples
To view all the circuit status of the board with slot as 3 and portinboard as 1, run the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show tkc slot 3 portinboard 1 GlbNo BoardType TDMNo TS Office TrunkType Direction 1056 DTU 1057 DTU 1058 DTU 1059 DTU 1060 DTU 1061 DTU 1062 DTU 1063 DTU 1064 DTU 1065 DTU 1066 DTU 1067 DTU 1068 DTU 1069 DTU 1070 DTU 1071 DTU 1072 DTU 1073 DTU 1074 DTU 1075 DTU 1076 DTU 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 32 2 33 2 34 2 35 2 36 2 37 2 38 2 39 2 40 2 41 2 42 2 43 2 44 2 45 2 46 2 47 2 48 2 49 2 50 2 51 2 52 2 CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL State SendNumberType ----- --------- ----- -- ------ --------- ----------- --------- -------------BiDirection UNINSTALL MFC BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC
4-96
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)

1077 DTU 1078 DTU 1079 DTU 1080 DTU 1081 DTU 1082 DTU 1083 DTU 1084 DTU 1085 DTU 1086 DTU 1087 DTU 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 53 2 54 2 55 2 56 2 57 2 58 2 59 2 60 2 61 2 62 2 63 2 CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL CASSIGNAL BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT BiDirection FAULT
4 Display Commands
MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC MFC
To view the circuit status of the board with slot as 3, portinboard as 1 and ts as 15, run the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show tkc slot 3 portinboard 1 ts 15 GlbNo BoardType TDMNo TS Office TrunkType Direction 1071 DTU 2 47 2 CASSIGNAL State SendNumberType ----- --------- ----- -- ------ --------- ----------- ----- -------------BiDirection FAULT MFC
Related Commands
None.
4.87 show tts connectpara

Function
The command is used to query the settings of the connection parameters on the TTS server.
Syntax
show tts connectpara
Parameters
None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Related Commands
config add tts connectpara config delete tts connectpara
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-97
4 Display Commands
config modify tts connectpara
4.88 show tts textpara

Function
The command is used to query the settings of the text parsing parameters on the TTS server.
Syntax
show tts textpara
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
Query the settings of the text parsing parameters on the TTS server.
[%UAP2100]> show tts textpara TTS TextPara Information No LangID EncodingScheme UnicodeEndian EngineInfo -- ------ -------------- ------------- ---------0 CHS GBK BIGENDIAN big
==== Command executed success ! ====
Output
After running the command successfully, the system displays the information as shown in the preceding example. The following table lists the related fields. Field No LangID EncodingScheme UnicodeEndian EngineInfo Description Serial number of the TTS text parsing parameter. Indicates the language type after the TTS conversion. Indicates the encoding mode. Indicates the byte order. Indicates the name of the engine.
4-98
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4 Display Commands
Related Commands
config add tts textpara config delete tts textpara config modify tts textpara
4.89 show tts voicepara

Function
The command is used to query the settings of the voice parameters on the TTS server.
Syntax
show tts voicepara
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To query the settings of the voice parameters on the current TTS server, run the following command:
[%UAP2100]> show tts voicepara TTS VoicePara Information TYPE PITCH SOUND SPEED TEMPLATE ---- ----- ----- ----- -------ALAW MID MID MID MALE
Output
After running the command successfully, the system displays the information as shown in the preceding example. The following table lists the related fields. Field TYPE PITCH Description Indicates the voice format. Indicates the voice tone.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-99
4 Display Commands
Field SOUND SPEED TEMPLATE
Description Indicates the voice volume. Indicates the voice speed. Indicates the template of the TTS integrated voice library. The values are as follows:

male indicates the voice of the male female indicates the voice of the female
Related Commands
config modify tts voicepara config modify tts voicepara setdefault
4.90 show version

Function
This command is used to view the device version.
Syntax
show version [slot <1-4>]
Parameters
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to query the hardware version, BIOS version number and software version of each board. If no slot number is entered, the main board version is queried by default.
Examples
To view the device version, run the following command:
4-100
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)

[%UAP2100(config)]#show version Version infomation of MPU ------------------------Pcb Primary Software Logic MCS51 VoiceFile Data EHP Patch Patch Version : SC02MPU VER B BIOS Version : 202
4 Display Commands
Secondary BIOS Version : 207 Version : V100R002C01B018 (Built on 2009/07/02 10:52:57) Version : (U25)103(U26)103(U47)203 Version : (U131)104 Version : V204 (Tone&Announcement 2009/06/10 14:54:39) Version : UAP2100_V202 Version : EHP V100R002C02B016 Name : ipcc_cmd_showcfg_patch.pat [PatchNum 3] Status : [ActiveNum: 3, PatchNo: 0,1,2] [DeActiveNum: 0]
Version infomation of VPU ------------------------Pcb CSDP TSDP Version : SC02VPU VER A Version : (U1)508 Version : (U6)212
Version infomation of MIB ------------------------Pcb Version : SC02MIB VER 0
Related Commands
None.
4.91 show vp
Function
The command is used to view all VP configuration records.
Syntax
show vp
Parameters
None
Modes
View
Usage Guidelines
None
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
4-101
4 Display Commands
Examples
View all VP configuration records:
[%UAP2100]> show vp VP Information VPNo E1PortNo SlotNo SlotE1No ASRNum TTSNum ---- -------- ------ -------- ------ -----10 0 1 0 0 0
Output
After running the command succeeds, the system displays the information as shown in the previous example. The following table lists the related parameters. Field VPNo E1PortNo SlotNo SlotE1No ASRNum TTSNum Description Indicates the number of a VP. Indicates the number of the E1 port on the VP voice card. Indicates the number of the slot where the board connecting the UAP to the VP resides. Indicates the number of the E1 port that connects the UAP to the VP. Indicates the number of the ASR resources that are allocated to the UAP. Indicates the number of the TTS resources that are allocated to the UAP.
Related Commands
config add vp config delete vp display vp by display vpchannel
4-102
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
5 Maintenance Commands
5
About This Chapter
Maintenance Commands
This chapter describes the functions, syntax, parameters, modes, usage guidelines, examples, and related commands of the maintenance commands of the UAP2100. You can get familiar with each maintenance command by reading this chapter.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
5-1
5.1 block subscriber dn

Function
The command is used to block a subscriber.
Syntax
block subscriber dn <string>
Parameters
Key Word and Value dn <string> Description Indicates the number of the subscriber. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to block the subscriber, and then to disable the call function of the subscriber. After the call conditions are satisfied (for example, the subscriber completes the payment program), the system enables the call function by unblocking the subscriber.
Examples
To block the subscriber with number 8026, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# block subscriber dn 8026
To view the status of this subscriber, carry out the following command (the subscriber should be in blocked status).
[%UAP2100(config)]# show subscriber dn 8026
Related Commands
show subscriber unblock subscriber dn
5.2 block subscriber domainname

Function
The command is used to block all the subscribers that belong to a domain.
5-2
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Syntax
block subscriber domainname <string>
Parameters
Key Word and Value domainname <string> Description Indicates the name of the domain. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to block all the subscribers in a domain, and then to disable the call function of the subscriber. After the call conditions are satisfied (for example, the subscribers complete the payment program), the system enables the call function by unblocking the subscribers.
Examples
To block all the subscribers in the pots domain, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# block subscriber domianname pots
To view the statuses of all the subscribers, carry out the following command (the subscriber should be in blocked status).
[%UAP2100(config)]# show subscriber domainname pots
Related Commands
show subscriber unblock subscriber domainname
5.3 config system date time

Function
The command is used to set the time of the system.
Syntax
config system date <YYYY-MM-DD> time <HH:MM:SS>
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
5-3
Parameters
Key Word and Value date <YYYY-MM-DD> time <HH:MM:SS> Description Indicates the system date. Indicates the system time. Default Value None None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
To check whether the configuration is successful, carry out the following command: show system time
Examples
To set the system time to 8 am on October 1, 2004, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# config system date 2004-10-01 time 08:00:00
Related Commands
show system time
5.4 ping
Function
The command is used to test the network connection between the UAP2100 system and other components in the network.
Syntax
ping [[-count] <1-65535>] [[-waittime] <1-255>] [[-ttl] <1-255>] <A.B.C.D>
Parameters
Key Word and Value [-count] <1-65535> [waittime] <1-255> Description Indicates the execution count of the command. Indicates the timeout response time of the command. If the peer end cannot get the respond in this time, the ping command fails. Indicates the lifecycle. Default Value 4 1
[-ttl] <1-255>
128
5-4
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Key Word and Value <A.B.C.D>
Description Indicates the IP address of the peer end.
Default Value None
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To ping a device with the IP address as 211.168.0.101, [-count] as 20, [waittime] as 4, and [-ttl] as 12, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> ping -count 20 -waittime 4 -ttl 12 211.168.0.101
Related Commands
None.
5.5 reboot
Function
The command is used to restart the system.
Syntax
reboot
Parameters
None.
Modes
Config,
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to restart the system. Before restarting, check whether the data needs to be saved. After executing this command, all the current conversations are interrupted.
Examples
To restart the system, carry out the following command:
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
5-5
[%UAP2100(config)]# reboot
Related Commands
save
5.6 reset board

Function
This command is used to reset the system.
Syntax
reset board
Parameters
None.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To reset the system, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# reset board
Related Commands
None.
5.7 reset card

Function
This command is to reset the card.
Syntax
reset card [slot <1-4>]
5-6
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameters
Key Word and Value slot <1-4> Description Indicates the number of the slot of the card in UAP2100. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to reset the card. If a slot number is entered, reset the board mapping the slot. Otherwise, reset all the cards.
Examples
To reset the card in slot 1, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# reset card slot 1
Related Commands
None.
5.8 reset mc51

Function
This command is used to reset the control module of the primary node.
Syntax
reset mc51
Parameters
None.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
5-7
Examples
To reset the control module of the primary node, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# reset mc51
Related Commands
None.
5.9 resource trace start board mpu

Function
This command is used to start tracking the usage of CPU and memory on the MPU main board.
Syntax
resource trace start board mpu
Parameters
None.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Run the command by choosing the menu on the OMU client; otherwise, if you use command lines to run the command, too much printed information is generated. Therefore, entering other commands is affected.
Examples
To start tracking the usage of CPU and memory on the MPU main board, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# resource trace start board mpu
Related Commands
resource trace stop board mpu
5-8
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
5.10 resource trace start dsp mpu

Function
This command is used to start tracking the usage of DSP on the MPU main board.
Syntax
resource trace start dsp mpu
Parameters
None.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Run the command by choosing the menu on the OMU client; otherwise, if you use command lines to run the command, too much printed information is generated. Therefore, entering other commands is affected.
Examples
To start tracking the usage of DSP on the MPU main board, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# resource trace start dsp mpu
Related Commands
resource trace stop dsp mpu
5.11 resource trace start e1

Function
This command is used to start tracking the usage of the E1 resource of a blade in a specified slot.
Syntax
resource trace start e1 slot <1-4>
Parameters
Keyword and Value slot <1-4> Description Indicates the slot number. Default Value None
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
5-9
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The blade in a specified slot must be a UAP-ETU blade. Run the command by choosing the menu on the OMU client; otherwise, if you use command lines to run the command, too much printed information is generated. Therefore, entering other commands is affected.
Examples
In slot 1, to start tracking the usage of the E1 resource of the blade, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# resource trace start e1 slot 1
Related Commands
resource trace stop e1
5.12 resource trace stop board mpu

Function
This command is used to stop tracking the usage of CPU and memory on the MPU main board.
Syntax
resource trace stop board mpu
Parameters
None.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To stop tracking the usage of CPU and memory on the MPU main board, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# resource trace stop board mpu
5-10
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Related Commands
resource trace start board mpu
5.13 resource trace stop dsp mpu

Function
This command is used to stop tracking the usage of DSP on the MPU main board.
Syntax
resource trace stop dsp mpu
Parameters
None.
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
None.
Examples
To stop tracking the usage of DSP on the MPU main board, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# resource trace stop dsp mpu
Related Commands
resource trace start dsp mpu
5.14 resource trace stop e1

Function
This command is used to stop tracking the usage of the E1 resource of a blade in a specified slot.
Syntax
resource trace stop e1 slot <1-4>
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
5-11
Parameters
Keyword and Value slot <1-4> Description Indicates the slot number. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
The blade in a specified slot must be a UAP-ETU blade.
Examples
To stop tracking the usage of the E1 resource of a blade in a specified slot, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# resource trace stop e1 slot 1
Related Commands
resource trace start e1
5.15 save
Function
The command is used to save all the configuration and service data to FLASH.
Syntax
save
Parameters
None.
Modes
View.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command before restarting the system or resetting cards.
5-12
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Examples
To save the configuration and service data to FLASH, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100]> save
Related Commands
reboot
5.16 start load subbox

Function
Download the subbox.bin file to the subscriber box to update the subscriber box program.
Format
start load subbox no <1-4>
Parameters
Key Word and Value no <1-4> Description Indicates the number of a subscriber box. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Before you run this command, update the subbox.bin file by running the command config upgrade download subbox.
Examples
Download the subbox.bin program to the No.1 subscriber box, run the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# start load subbox no 1
Related Commands
config upgrade download
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
5-13
5.17 switch workmode

Function
The command is used to change workmode of the UAP2100.
Syntax
switch workmode flag [<bmrs | normal>]
Parameters
Key Word and Value flag <bmrs | normal> Description Indicates the workmode of the UAP2100:

Default Value None
bmrs normal
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
When the workmode of the UAP2100 is changed, All the information of the VP/CP will be cleared.
Examples
Change workmode of the UAP2100 from bmrs to normal:
[%UAP2100(config)]#switch workmode flag normal
Related Commands
None.
5.18 telnet
Function
The command is used to telnet other device from the UAP2100.
Syntax
telnet <A.B.C.D> [<1-65535>]
5-14
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
Parameters
Key Word and Value <A.B.C.D> <1-65535> Description Indicates the IP address of the remote device Indicates the port No. of the remote device Default Value None 23
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to telnet a device. Use the ping command to ping the remote IP address of the remote device. If the ping command fails, you cannot telnet the equipment.
Examples
To telnet a device with the IP address as 192.168.0.120, and the port No. as 23, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# telnet 192.168.0.120 23
Related Commands
ping
5.19 unblock subscriber dn

Function
The command is used to unblock a subscriber.
Syntax
unblock subscriber dn <string>
Parameters
Key Word and Value dn <string> Description Indicates the number of the subscriber. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
5-15
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to unblock a subscriber and to enable the call function of the subscriber.
Examples
To unblock the subscriber with dn as 8026, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# unblock subscriber dn 8026
To view the status of the subscriber, carry out the following command (the subscriber should be in unblocked status):
[%UAP2100(config)]# show subscriber dn 8026
Related Commands
block subscriber dn show subscriber
5.20 unblock subscriber domainname

Function
The command is used to unblock the subscribers that belong to a domain.
Syntax
unblock subscriber domainname <string>
Parameters
Key Word and Value domainname <string> Description Indicates the name of the domain. Default Value None
Modes
Config.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to unblock the subscribers in the domain and to enable the call function of the subscribers.
Examples
To unblock all the subscribers in the pots domain, carry out the following command:
[%UAP2100(config)]# unblock subscriber domainname pots
5-16
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
To view the statuses of all the subscribers in the pots domain, carry out the following command (the subscribers should be in unblocked status):
[%UAP2100(config)]# show subscriber domainname pots
Related Commands
block subscriber domainname show subscriber
Issue 01 (2010-11-26)
5-17

UAP2100 Command Reference (V100R002C05 - 01)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

UAP2100 Command Reference (V100R002C05 - 01)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HUAWEI UAP2100 Universal Access Platform V100R002C05

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI UAP2100 Command Reference

2 Basic CLI Commands ................................................................................................................2-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI UAP2100 Command Reference

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI UAP2100 Command Reference

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI UAP2100 Command Reference

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI UAP2100 Command Reference

4 Display Commands ...................................................................................................................4-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI UAP2100 Command Reference

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI UAP2100 Command Reference

5 Maintenance Commands ..........................................................................................................5-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI UAP2100 Command Reference

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI UAP2100 Command Reference

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI UAP2100 Command Reference

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI UAP2100 Command Reference

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI UAP2100 Command Reference

1.1 Logging In to CLI

1.1.1 Logging In to CLI Locally Through Serial Interface

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI UAP2100 Command Reference

1.1.2 Logging In to CLI Through Telnet

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI UAP2100 Command Reference

1.2 Mode and Level

1.3 Syntax Convention

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI UAP2100 Command Reference

Symbol description Parameter type

1.3.1 Command Structure

1.3.2 Symbol Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI UAP2100 Command Reference

1.3.3 Parameter Type

Date Time List

<YYYY-MMDD> <HH:MM:SS> <list(min:max)>

For <mgcp&h.248&pots>, mgcp or mgcp&h.248 can be entered. 20-2B-3A-00-00-8A

1.4 Operation Guide

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI UAP2100 Command Reference

Complementing a Command Abbreviating a command Getting a command

1.4.1 Complementing a Command

1.4.2 Abbreviating a Command

sh sys infor ssi

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI UAP2100 Command Reference

1.4.3 Getting a Command